JP6764391B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a display means and a display control means for controlling the display of the display means.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display means and a display control means for controlling the display of the display means is known (see Patent Document 1).
This game machine includes a special symbol display device, an effect control board that controls the display of the special symbol display device, and a main control board that transmits a symbol control command to the effect control board.
Then, the effect control board controls the display of the special symbol display device in response to the symbol control command received from the main control board.
Further, the main control board is provided with an output port for outputting a symbol control command to the effect control board. Then, when the main control board detects the power supply stop, the main control board sets a value corresponding to the off state (signal output stop) as the value of each bit of the output port.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-58664

However, in the conventional game machine, the display of the display means may be inappropriate.
That is, in recent game machines, information calculated based on the number of game balls launched into the game area and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of the game balls into a predetermined entry port. A display means for displaying (hereinafter referred to as "base ratio") is provided.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the configuration is provided with the display means for displaying the base ratio, the display by the display means may be inappropriate when the power supply stop is detected.
An object of the present invention is to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the display means becomes inappropriate.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the first invention has the number of game balls fired in the game area and the number of prize balls paid out according to the number of game balls entering a predetermined entry port. If, on the display means capable of displaying predetermined information calculated on the basis, and control means capable of setting control information for controlling the display of said display means, a first region, a second region, said first A storage unit including a third area stored in one area and used when executing a program, and a fourth area stored in the second area and used when executing a program. And, the information stored in the third area can be referred to by the program stored in the second area, and is stored in the third area by the program stored in the second area. when rewriting of information are is not possible and that the power cut-off has been detected, the said control information set by the program stored in the second region is stored in the first region It is characterized by being cleared by a program .
In general, the process for setting control information has a larger amount of processing than the process for initializing control information.
Therefore, the gaming machine according to the first invention has a configuration in which control information for controlling the display of the display means is set by a program stored in the second area (unused area of the ROM).
This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the program stored in the first area (the area used by the ROM).
On the other hand, when calling the program stored in the second area during execution of the program stored in the first area, the process of setting the interrupt disabled state is used by the program stored in the first area. Evacuation processing such as processing to protect (save) the registered register is required. Therefore, as the number of times the program stored in the second area is called increases, the number of times of the required save processing increases, and as a result, the capacity of the program increases.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, when a power cutoff is detected, the control information for controlling the display of the display means is cleared by the program stored in the first area. There is.
As a result, the number of times the program stored in the second area is called during execution of the program stored in the first area can be reduced, and as a result, the increase in the number of times of saving processing can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the program.
As described above, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to reduce the control burden in controlling the display of the display means.
Here, as the game area, the game area 30 described later corresponds. As the predetermined ball entry port, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57, which will be described later, correspond. The base ratio described later corresponds to the predetermined information. As the display means, the performance display device 61 described later corresponds. The value of the port register of the output port 4 corresponds to the control information. The main control circuit 200, which will be described later, corresponds to the control means. The used area m1 described later corresponds to the first area. The second area corresponds to the unused area m2 described later. ROM 220, which will be described later, corresponds to the storage unit.

The gaming machine according to the second invention is the game machine according to the first invention when a program stored in the second area is executed based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger and a power cutoff is detected. It is characterized in that the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity is limited .

The gaming machine according to the third invention includes a lottery means for executing a winning lottery according to a set value in the gaming machine according to the first or second invention, and the set value can be displayed by the display means. The control information used for displaying the set value is set by the program stored in the first area, and the control information used for displaying the predetermined information is set by the program stored in the second area. characterized in that that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the display means becomes inappropriate.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of the game board, and schematically showed the part necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. This is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main display and the performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation processing at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value management process. It is a flowchart which shows the dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure start ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening end wait processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the subtimer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command reception process. It is a figure which shows the circuit around the CPU mounted on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the circuit around the input port mounted on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the input circuit of various detection signals mounted on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the circuit around the output port mounted on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the test signal output circuit mounted on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a main display and a performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the base ratio calculation process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. As a result, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.
The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). Then, the outer frame included in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.

The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged at a substantially central portion, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 arranged under the transparent plate 4a, and a saucer. It has a firing handle 6 arranged on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound extraction unit 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output by the sound generator 22 passes. Further, a plurality of frame lamps 20 (see FIG. 3) are arranged in the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 is configured to include a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 has a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), an effect button 5b arranged on the front side of the saucer 5a, and a rotary selector 5c.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape, and is arranged so as to project upward from the saucer unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (operated downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is arranged so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated (operated around a cylindrical axis) by a player. Inside the saucer unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is arranged. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to the CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating the information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when the prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, as the prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like is applicable.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the launch handle 6, a launch volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the launch handle 6 is rotated is arranged. The firing volume outputs a detection signal according to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Structure of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front surface of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize the game board 11 (game area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30 described later is configured between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set plate (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set plate, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set plate. An image display device 32 and the like) are provided.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with the front side open. An opening formed of a through hole is provided at a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate. The game board 11 is formed of a resin in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which a game ball launched in response to a rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flows down. Then, in the game area 30, as a path through which the game ball flows down, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured. There is.
Further, a plurality of board surface lamps 21 (see FIG. 3) are arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11. Each board lamp 21 is configured to include a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying an effect image.
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) on which the first effect symbol z1 (not shown) and a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first effect symbol z1 is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect symbol z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.
The variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of the effect symbol z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one type of first effect symbol z1 is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4. In, a display in which one type of second effect symbol z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a special symbol is created by combining the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) on which the reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information in the notification display (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is suspended is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is arranged at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of variable display devices such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) along the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and the effect position below the origin position (not shown). There is.
The sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting port 51 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first start port 51. The special figure 1 start port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the first start port 51) that has entered the first start port 51. Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.
On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55, a left middle other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57 are provided. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is an entrance opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left route (it is not possible to enter a game ball flowing down the right route).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning opening switch 106 is a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning opening 55 (a game ball has entered the upper left other winning opening 55) and a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning opening 56 (a left middle other winning opening). The main control circuit outputs the detection signal in response to the detection of the game ball (entering the game ball into the mouth 56) and the game ball (entering the game ball into the lower left other winning opening 57). Output for 200. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The starting gate 41 is formed so that it can be passed by a game ball at all times. The starting gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible for a game ball flowing down the left path).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is provided at the starting gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.
A large winning opening 53 is provided below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30. The large winning opening 53 is displaced into a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53. A special electric accessory (special electric accessory) 53a (so-called “attacker”) is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by the large winning opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the large winning opening 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter a game ball, but the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. When a big hit game state occurs, the special electric accessory 53a is opened and the game ball can be inserted. The large winning opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 53). The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103.

A second starting port 52 is provided below the large winning opening 53 in the game area 30. The second starting port 52 has a closed state that prevents the game ball from entering the second starting port 52 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). At the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is not allowed to enter. The 52a is set to the open state, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A special figure 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second start port 52. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.
Below the second starting port 52 in the game area 30, a right other winning port 54 is provided. The right other winning opening 54 is an entry opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. The right other winning opening 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other winning opening 54. The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning opening 54 (the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54). .. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105.

At the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 for discharging a game ball that has not won (winned) in any of the winning ports 51 to 57 is provided.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game ball discharged from the game area 30 passes. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls discharged from the game area 30) are configured to pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 and flows into the discharge path by entering any of the winning openings 51 to 57 or by passing through the out opening 58. To do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered each of the winning openings 51 to 57 are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101-103, 105, 106 arranged in the winning openings. Further, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the inner frame unit 3. Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball discharged from the game area 30) passing through the discharge path. As a result, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game ball to each of the winning openings 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41.

A main display 60 is arranged on the game board 11. The main display 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display 60. That is, the main display 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, and a status display device.
Specifically, the main display 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). Then, in the main display 60, LEDs 1 to LED 8 serve as a special figure 1 display device, LEDs 7 to LED 16 serve as a special figure 2 display device, LEDs 17 to LED 24 serve as a normal figure display device, and LEDs 25 to LED 32 serve as status displays. It is a device.
The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the times when the variable display is started. , The time when the stop display is started, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or the second special symbol (stop displayed) displayed on the special figure 2 display device. When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), a jackpot gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The ordinary symbol display device can perform variable display and stop display of ordinary symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed by the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (per symbol per symbol), a game state per normal symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (the number of reservations of special figure 1) and the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended in the status display device (special figure 2). Number of holds), number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is held (number of hold of normal figures), type of jackpot game state (number of round games executed), instruction to launch a game ball to the right route, etc. Is displayed.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, as the detection sensor, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal (glass frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. To do.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal (inner frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. To do.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal (board surface vibration detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the game board 11 is provided with two radio wave detection sensors 114. Then, each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal (board surface radio wave detection sensor signal 1, board surface radio wave detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects the magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, in the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal (out port magnetic detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the detection of magnetism. Send to. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 sends a detection signal (board surface magnetic detection sensor signal 1, board surface magnetic detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 in response to magnetic detection. And send.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing circuits around the CPU mounted on the main control board. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a circuit around an input port mounted on the main control board. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing input circuits of various detection signals mounted on the main control board. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a circuit around an output port mounted on the main control board. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a test signal output circuit mounted on the main control board.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board e1, a sub control board e2, a payout control board e3, an inner frame board e4, an external terminal board e5, a connection board e6, a panel board e7, and the like as circuit boards.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6, and the panel board e7 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, the main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6, and the panel board e7 are each housed in separate board cases (not shown). ing.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with various control circuits.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300, the payout control circuit 400, the control circuits 200, 300, 400, and the like. It includes a power supply circuit 600 for supplying.
Each control circuit 200, 300, 400 has a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game, and a CPU stored in the ROM. It is a microcomputer provided with a RAM (Random Access Memory) which is a temporary storage area used to proceed with processing based on a program.

The main control circuit 200 is mounted on the main control board e1. The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the input port 240 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input ports 0 to input ports 3).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the input port 0 has a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and vibration detection. Detection signal from sensor 113 (board vibration detection sensor signal), detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (board radio wave detection sensor signal 2), detection signal from three magnetic detection sensors 115 (out port magnetic detection sensor signal) , Board surface magnetic detection sensor signal 1, board surface magnetic detection sensor signal 2), etc. are input.
A detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and a magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3. The detection signal (out port magnetic detection sensor signal) is input to the input port 0 via the payout control board e3 and the inner frame board e4.
A detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113 (board vibration detection sensor signal), a detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (board radio wave detection sensor signal 2), and each magnetic detection sensor arranged on the game board 11. The detection signal from 115 (board surface magnetic detection sensor signal 1, board surface magnetic detection sensor signal 2) is input to the input port 0 via the panel board e7.

A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, a detection signal from the key rotation detection switch 111 (not shown), a detection signal from the set value selection switch (not shown), and the like are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a radio wave detection sensor 114 from the other. A detection signal (board radio wave detection sensor signal 1) or the like is input.
A detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, and the like are input to the input port 3.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set.
Specifically, "1" is set in each reception storage area when the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and "1" is set when the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input. 0 ”is set.

As shown in FIG. 46, the output port 250 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (output ports 0 to output ports 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs a data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60. Then, the data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 510 described later.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 530 described later.
The output port 2 outputs external signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8). The external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer 450 via the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, and the external terminal board e5.
The external signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8) output from the output port 2 are input to the hall computer 450 via the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, and the external terminal board e5.

The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the grand prize opening solenoid 65, and the like. Each control signal output from the output port 3 is input to the solenoids 64 and 65 via the panel board e7.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61. Then, the data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 520 described later.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand transmission signal) from the command output port 1 to the effect control circuit 300, and also transmits a control command (payout command transmission) from the command output port 2 to the payout control circuit 400. Signal) is transmitted.
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 are a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown), respectively. have.
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer and transmits it as serial data to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the test signal output circuit 900 is mounted on the main control board e1.
In the test signal management process (step S4-18) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.). Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port.
Then, the test signal output from the predetermined output port is input to the interface board of the computer for testing (not shown) via the test signal output circuit 900.
Further, the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, and the detection from the right winning port switch 105. The signal, the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, the detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 240 and also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit 900. To.
Further, the control signals for controlling the drive of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, grand prize opening solenoid 65, etc.) output from the output port 3 are input to the solenoids 64 and 65, and are also test signals. It is input to the interface board of the test computer via the output circuit 900.

The main control circuit 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. ..
Here, in FIG. 4, the address for specifying the memory area is indicated by a hexadecimal number (“H” indicates that it is a hexadecimal number).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) is provided with a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
A program and data for controlling the progress of the game are stored (stored) in the used area m1.
In the non-use area m2, a program and data for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, and a program and data for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 (a program for calculating the base ratio described later). And data) and are stored (stored).
The used area m1 is provided with a program area (0000H to 0A89H), an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H to 1A7AH). A program for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the program area. On the other hand, in the data area, data for controlling the progress of the game is stored. The used area m1 may be configured not to include an unused area.
The non-use area m2 is provided with a program area (2000H to 27FFH) and a data area (2800H to 2BFFH). Then, in the program area, a program for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules and a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 are stored. On the other hand, in the data area, data for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules and data for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 are stored.
Further, in addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH), a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH), and the like. There is.
Arbitrary data such as a program title and version is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 4 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. Thereby, the boundary between the used area m1 and the non-used area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is provided with a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F210H to F228H).
The used area M1 is used when executing a process based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. That is, various data are temporarily stored in the used area M1 when the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1 is executed.
The out-of-use area M2 is a process based on a program stored in the out-of-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the game machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61). Used when executing. That is, in the non-use area M2, a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the game machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61). Various data are temporarily stored when executing the process based on.
Specifically, in the used area M1, input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), a lottery result, a flag for managing the game state, and the like are temporarily stored. Is remembered. In particular, the used area M1 stores start information acquired when detection signals are input from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104 (the area for storing the start information. A start information storage area (described later) is provided.
The used area M1 is provided with a work area (F000H to F12AH), an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and a stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH). The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. The used area M1 may be configured not to include the unused area.
The non-use area M2 is provided with a work area (F210H to F21FH) and a stack area (F220H to F228H). Then, in the work area, a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by a game machine rule, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) is being executed. It is also used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, in the stack area, a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) is being executed. It is also used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 having a predetermined byte (4 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2 is clarified.

In particular, in the present embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-used area M2 in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
On the other hand, it is prohibited that the data stored in the unused area M2 is rewritten (changed) by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
Further, in the processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test defined by the game machine rules, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the used area is subjected to the processing based on the program stored in the non-used area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61). It is prohibited that the data stored in M1 is rewritten (changed).
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronous signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270.
The hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a first loop counter that generates a winning random number in the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the first special symbol lottery, and a jackpot random number in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a third loop counter and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260. A random number is generated by winning a normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260. Generate a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260. Generate a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10066) every time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (once every 32 divisions of the clock frequency). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in (within range). In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

Further, the main control board e1 is provided with a set value operation unit (not shown). The set value operation unit includes a key rotation detection switch 111, a set value selection switch 112, and a set value display device 62.
The key rotation detection switch 111 has an operation unit capable of switching between a setting permission state and a setting prohibition state. Then, the key rotation detection switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting permission state. On the other hand, the key rotation detection switch 111 stops the output of the detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting prohibition state.
In the present embodiment, the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is provided with a keyhole into which a dedicated key is inserted. Then, in the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permitted state or setting prohibited state) can be switched by inserting the dedicated key into the keyhole. That is, in the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permitted state or setting prohibited state) cannot be switched unless the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole.
Further, in the key rotation detection switch 111, when the operation unit is in the setting prohibition state, it is possible to insert the dedicated key into the keyhole, and it is possible to extract the dedicated key from the keyhole. On the other hand, in the key rotation detection switch 111, when the operation unit is in the setting permission state, it is impossible to insert the dedicated key into the keyhole, and it is impossible to extract the dedicated key from the keyhole. Become.
The set value selection switch 112 has an operation unit that can be pressed. Then, the set value selection switch 112 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 each time the operation unit is pressed.
The set value display device 62 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The set value display device 62 displays the set value described later. Since the set value display device 62 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.

Here, the setting information (setting value) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "setting information" is information for designating the winning probability (probability of winning the jackpot game state) of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery).
The RAM of the main control circuit 200 is provided with a setting information storage area. In the setting information storage area, a value of any one of "1" to "6" is set (stored) as setting information. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the probability according to the value set in the setting information storage area.
In the following description, the value stored in the setting information storage area is referred to as a “setting value”.
In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each set value are, in order from the one with the highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "6" and the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "5". , Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "4", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "3", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "2", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "1" (Winning) Probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the set value when the power is turned on. Here, the change of the set value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (an employee of the amusement park where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.).
In the pachinko machine 1, the set value change permission state is started in response to the power being turned on while the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is displaced to the setting permission state.
During the setting value change permission state, a value indicating a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is displayed on the setting value display device 62.
Further, in the setting value change permission state, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed each time the setting value selection switch 112 is pressed. At this time, if the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area is changed, the value displayed on the set value display device 62 (value indicating the set value) is also changed accordingly. Be changed.
As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 sets a desired value among "1" to "6" as the set value by pressing the set value selection switch 112 while the set value change permission state is in effect. Can be (selected).
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value change permission state is terminated in response to the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 being switched from the setting permission state to the setting prohibition state. This makes it impossible to change the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area. Further, upon termination of the set value change permission state, the display of the value indicating the set value on the set value display device 62 is terminated.

Further, the performance display device 61 is provided on the main control board e1. Since the performance display device 61 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
The performance display device 61 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
The performance display device 61 includes the number of game balls fired in the game area 30 and a predetermined entry port (in the present embodiment, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and other winning ports 54 to 57). The number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the player and the information calculated based on the information (base ratio described later) are displayed.
The performance display device 61 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 61 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64). In the performance display device 61, LEDs 33 to LED 40 serve as the first digit display unit, LEDs 41 to LED 48 serve as the second digit display unit, and LEDs 49 to LED 56 serve as the third digit display unit, and LEDs 57 to LED 64. Is the display unit of the 4th digit.
The main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio described later during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and the stop of the time saving control). Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 61.
The "base ratio" is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls. The main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio in the predetermined section (period) for each predetermined section (period).
In the present embodiment, a section in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 [balls] in the present embodiment) is detected (discharged) is defined as a predetermined section. That is, each section is started according to the end of the previous section, and is ended when the number of out balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
Here, a predetermined time may be specified as a predetermined section. That is, the main control circuit 200 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. The “out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. In the present embodiment, the out ball refers to a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
Here, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game balls discharged from the out port 58, and the game balls detected by the out switch 109 may be used as the out balls.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57.
On the performance display device 61, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 61, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) by the upper two-digit display unit among the four-digit display units. Is displayed. Further, in the performance display device 61, the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the display unit of the lower two digits of the four-digit display unit.

The effect control circuit 300 is mounted on the sub control board e2.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
Based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 displays the effect images on the image display devices 31 and 32, lights the lamps 20 and 21, and outputs the sound by the sound generator 22. It controls the drive of a motor (not shown) that drives a movable body.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like are temporarily stored.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, and the like are generated according to the effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the determined content of the effect. Then, the control signals based on the generated control data are output to the image display devices 31, 32, the sound generator 22, the lamps 20, 21, the motors, and the like.

The payout control circuit 400 is mounted on the payout control board e3.
The payout control circuit 400 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
The payout control circuit 400 controls the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching device 430 based on the detection signal input from the firing volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching device 430 so that the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area 30 with a strength corresponding to the detection signal input from the firing volume. To do.
Further, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on each of the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. Then, when the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency required for paying out a predetermined number of ball lending from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card. Along with updating the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card, a ball lending instruction signal instructing the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board e6. Further, the payout control circuit 400 controls the payout operation of the game balls by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls when the ball lending instruction signal is received.
The CR unit 500 transmits a frequency signal indicating the residual frequency of the valuable medium when the prepaid cart is inserted and when the record of the residual frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated via the connection board e6. It is transmitted to the display device 7c. Then, when the frequency display device 7c receives the frequency signal, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. Then, when the CR unit 500 receives the return operation signal, it returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

Next, a specific configuration of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a configuration of a main display and a performance display device. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a drive circuit of a main display and a performance display device.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main display 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). Further, the performance display device 61 includes 32 lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64).
Then, the CPU 210 drives the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60 and the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61 by dynamic lighting control.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, a source driver (segment driver) 510, a source driver (segment driver) 520, and a sink driver (common driver) 530 are mounted on the main control board e1. There is.

The source driver 510 controls the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60.
The source driver 510 includes eight transistors TR1 to TR8. Each of the transistors TR1 to TR8 is an NPN type transistor.
A power supply voltage Vcc is applied from the power supply circuit 600 to the collector electrodes of the transistors TR1 to TR8. Further, data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) are input from the CPU 210 (output port 0) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR1 to TR8.

The data signal line DL1 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR1 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED1, LED9, LED17, and LED25 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL1.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR1 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL1. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR1 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL1.
The data signal line DL2 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR2 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED2, LED10, LED18, and LED26 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL2.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR2 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL2. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR2 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL2.
The data signal line DL3 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR3 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED3, LED11, LED19, and LED27 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL3.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR3 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL3. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR3 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL3.
The data signal line DL4 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR4 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED4, LED12, LED20, and LED28 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL4.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR4 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL4. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR4 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL4.

The data signal line DL5 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR5 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED5, LED13, LED21, and LED29 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL5.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA4”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR5 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL5. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA4”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR5 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL5.
The data signal line DL6 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR6 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED6, LED14, LED22, and LED30 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL6.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR6 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL6. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR6 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL6.
The data signal line DL7 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR7 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED7, LED15, LED23, and LED31 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL7.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR7 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL7. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR7 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL7.
The data signal line DL8 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR8 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED8, LED16, LED24, and LED32 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL8.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR8 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL8. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR8 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL8.

The source driver 520 controls the lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61.
The source driver 520 is configured to include eight transistors TR9 to TR16. Each of the transistors TR9 to TR16 is an NPN type transistor.
A power supply voltage Vcc is applied from the power supply circuit 600 to the collector electrodes of the transistors TR9 to TR16. Further, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") are input from the CPU 210 (output port 4) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR9 to TR16.

The data signal line DL9 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR9 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 33, LED 41, LED 49, and LED 57 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL9.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR9 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL9. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR9 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL9.
The data signal line DL10 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR10 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED34, LED42, LED50, and LED58 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL10.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR10 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL10. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR10 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL10.
The data signal line DL11 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR11 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED35, LED43, LED51, and LED59 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL11.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR11 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL11. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR11 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL11.
The data signal line DL12 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR12 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 36, LED 44, LED 52, and LED 60 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL12.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR12 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL12. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR12 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL12.

The data signal line DL13 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR13 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 37, LED 45, LED 53, and LED 61 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL13.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA4”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR13 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL13. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA4”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR13 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL13.
The data signal line DL14 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR14 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED38, LED46, LED54, and LED62 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL14.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR14 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL14. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR14 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL14.
The data signal line DL15 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR15 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED39, LED47, LED55, and LED63 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL15.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR15 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL15. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR15 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL15.
The data signal line DL16 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR16 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED40, LED48, LED56, and LED64 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL16.
As a result, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR16 (when the data signal becomes high level), a power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL16. On the other hand, unless a data signal (“7SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR16 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL16.

The sink driver 530 controls the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60 and the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61.
The sink driver 530 is configured to include four transistors TR17 to TR20. Each of the transistors TR17 to TR20 is an NPN type transistor.
The emitter electrodes of the transistors TR17 to TR20 are electrically connected to the ground terminal of the power supply circuit 600. Further, common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) are input from the CPU 210 (output port 1) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR17 to TR20.

A common signal line CL1 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR17. Then, the cathode electrodes of LEDs 1 to LED8 (lighting element group a) of the main display 60 and LEDs 33 to LED40 (lighting element group A) of the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal line CL1. ing.
As a result, when a common signal (“COM0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR17 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL1 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, unless a common signal (“COM0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR17 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL1 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
A common signal line CL2 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR18. Then, the cathode electrodes of LEDs 9 to LED 16 (lighting element group b) of the main display 60 and LEDs 41 to LED 48 (lighting element group B) of the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal line CL2. ing.
As a result, when a common signal (“COM1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR18 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL2 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, unless a common signal (“COM1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR18 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL2 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
A common signal line CL3 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR19. The cathode electrodes of LEDs 17 to 24 (lighting element group c) of the main display 60 and LEDs 49 to LED56 (lighting element group C) of the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal line CL3. ing.
As a result, when a common signal (“COM2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR19 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL3 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, unless a common signal (“COM2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR19 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL3 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
A common signal line CL4 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR20. Then, the cathode electrodes of LEDs 25 to LED 32 (lighting element group d) of the main display 60 and LEDs 57 to LED 64 (lighting element group D) of the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal line CL4. ing.
As a result, when a common signal (“COM3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR20 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL4 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, unless a common signal (“COM3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR20 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL4 is not grounded to the ground terminal.

The sink driver 530 has a function of selecting a lighting element group (lighting element group) that can be lit.
In the present embodiment, the first lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR17 (common signal line CL1), the second lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR18 (common signal line CL2), and the transistor TR19 (common signal line CL3) A corresponding third lighting element group and a fourth lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR20 (common signal line CL4) are configured.
The first lighting element group includes LEDs 1 to LED 8 (lighting element group a) of the main display 60, and LEDs 33 to LED 40 (lighting element group A) of the performance display device 61.
The second lighting element group includes LEDs 9 to LED 16 (lighting element group b) of the main display 60 and LEDs 41 to LED 48 (lighting element group B) of the performance display device 61.
The third lighting element group includes LEDs 17 to LEDs 24 (lighting element group c) of the main display 60 and LEDs 49 to LED 56 (lighting element group C) of the performance display device 61.
The fourth lighting element group includes LEDs 25 to LED 32 (lighting element group d) of the main display 60 and LEDs 57 to LED 64 (lighting element group D) of the performance display device 61.
All the lighting elements included in each of the first lighting element group to the fourth lighting element group are electrically connected to the common signal line corresponding to the lighting element group. That is, each lighting element (LED1 to LED8, LED33 to LED40) included in the first lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL1. Each lighting element (LED9 to LED16, LED41 to LED48) included in the second lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL2. Each lighting element (LED17 to LED24, LED49 to LED56) included in the third lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL3. Each lighting element (LED25 to LED32, LED57 to LED64) included in the fourth lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL4.
The CPU 210 outputs a common signal to any one of the transistors TR17 to TR20 (sets the common signal to a high level). Then, the CPU 210 sequentially switches the transistors that output the common signal (makes the common signal high level) among the transistors TR17 to TR20 in a predetermined cycle.
Specifically, each time the dynamic port output process (step S4-4) described later is executed, the transistor that outputs the common signal (makes the common signal high level) among the transistors TR17 to TR20 is predetermined. It can be switched in the order of.
As a result, each time the dynamic port output process (step S4-4) is executed, the common signal lines grounded to the ground terminal among the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 are switched in a predetermined order.
That is, the sink driver 530 grounds and grounds one of the common signal lines CL1 to the common signal line CL4 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) input from the CPU 210. The lighting element group corresponding to the common signal line can be lit.

On the other hand, each of the source drivers 510 and 520 selects a lighting element to be lit from among a plurality of lighting elements included in the lighting element group (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) selected by the sink driver 530. It has a function.
As described above, each lighting element group (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) is composed of 16 lighting elements. The 16 lighting elements included in each lighting element group (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) are electrically connected to different data signal lines (transistors TR1 to TR16).
Then, the CPU 210 lights (drives) among the lighting elements connected to the one common signal line during the period when one of the common signal lines CL1 to the common signal line CL4 is grounded. ) A data signal is output to the transistors TR1 to TR16 corresponding to the lighting element to be sought (the data signal is set to a high level).
Specifically, by the dynamic port output processing (step S4-4), a common signal is output to one of the transistors TR17 to TR20, and the common is grounded by the output of the common signal. Among the lighting elements connected to the signal line, the data signal is output to the transistors TR1 to TR16 corresponding to the lighting elements to be lit.
As a result, the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line corresponding to the lighting element to be lit among the lighting elements connected to the common signal line grounded according to the output of the common signal, and as a result. , A current flows through the lighting element to be lit, and the lighting element is lit.
From the above, it is possible to drive LEDs 1 to LED 64 by dynamic lighting control by combining the common data for selecting the common signal line to be grounded and the segment data for selecting the data signal line to which the power supply voltage Vcc is applied. Become.
In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 510 corresponding to the main display 60 and a source driver 520 corresponding to the performance display device 61. Then, the source driver 510 controls the application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines DL1 to DL8 included in the main display 60. On the other hand, the source driver 520 controls the application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines DL9 to DL16 included in the performance display device 61. As a result, the application of the power supply plan Vcc to the data signal line is individually controlled by the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 530 is provided for the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. Further, in the lighting element group (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) corresponding to each common signal line CL1 to CL4, a lighting element (lighting element group) constituting the main display 60 and a performance display device 61 A lighting element (lighting element group) constituting the above is included. That is, the lighting elements (lighting element group) constituting the main display 60 and the lighting elements (lighting element group) constituting the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4. There is. Then, the sink driver 530 controls the grounding of each common signal line CL1 to CL4. As a result, the grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to provide a sink driver 530 corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61, and as a result, an output port corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 ( It is not necessary to provide an output port) for outputting a common signal.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required for lighting control of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
Further, in the main control circuit 200 (CPU210), it is no longer necessary to generate common signals corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61, and control for lighting control of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 is eliminated. It is possible to reduce the load.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate 41. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a game state is generated per normal symbol. In the normal game state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of "per-figure" is set as the type of the game state per per-figure that occurs when the ordinary symbol lottery is won.

When the "normal symbol hit" is won (the ordinary symbol lottery is won), the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "normal symbol per symbol" in the general symbol display device.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device is controlled so that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the "missing symbol".
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a time saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened as compared with the time when the time reduction control is stopped. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is shortened during the execution of the time reduction control as compared with the case where the time reduction control is stopped. Further, during the time reduction control execution, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is increased and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased in the game state per normal figure as compared with the time reduction control being stopped. It will be extended.
When the "per-figure" is won, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. It is set to [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. Set. On the other hand, while the time reduction control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 0.5 [s] each time. Will be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, a big hit game state occurs. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" are set as the types of big hit gaming states that occur when the first special symbol lottery is won, and it occurs when the second special symbol lottery is won. As the type of the big hit game state, "big hit 6" to "big hit 10" are set.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the special figure 1 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 1 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "chance symbol".
Here, as for the "chance symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 (normal effect symbol) stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is "6, 6, 6". , Etc., and the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 2" is won, the special figure 1 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 2 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "chance symbol".
When the "big hit 3" is won, the special figure 1 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 3 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "bonus symbol".
Here, the "bonus symbol" is, for example, a predetermined first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "1, 1, 1". A mode in which the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color while being combined.
When the "big hit 4" is won, the special figure 1 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 4 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "bonus symbol".
When the "big hit 5" is won, the special figure 1 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 5 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "bonus symbol".
When the "big hit 6" is won, the special figure 2 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 6 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "hidden symbol".
Here, the "hidden symbol" is, for example, a predetermined first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "1, 2, 3". A mode in which the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color while being combined.
When the "big hit 7" is won, the special figure 2 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 7 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "hidden symbol".
When the "big hit 8" is won, the special figure 2 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 8 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "probability variation symbol".
Here, in the "probability variation symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "7, 7, 7". The second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is arranged in a "number symbol" indicating an odd number, and shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 9" is won, the special figure 2 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 9 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "probability variation symbol".
When the "big hit 10" is won, the special figure 2 display device is controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "big hit 10 symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the "probability variation symbol".

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "missing"), the display devices 61 and 62 are controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the "missing symbol". At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "outlier symbol".
Here, in the "outlier symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as "1, 6, 9". The number indicated by the displayed "number symbol" is a different combination from the number indicated by the "number symbol" stopped and displayed in another area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is an embodiment showing a predetermined color.

When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 10" are won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit game state.
In the present embodiment, when "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5", "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" is won, the number of round games is set to 4 [times]. On the other hand, if the "big hit 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 12 [times]. On the other hand, if the "big hit 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 8 [times]. On the other hand, if the "big hit 8" is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, when the "big hit 9" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times]. On the other hand, when the "big hit 10" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times].
When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 10" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). To. Then, in each round game, the maximum opening time set after the special electric accessory 53a is opened and the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 53 in the round game are determined. It is terminated when one of the predetermined upper limit number (10 [balls] in the present embodiment) is established.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the gaming states related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) are "special symbol low probability state" and "special symbol high probability state". Is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the "special symbol low probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is regarded as the first probability (hereinafter referred to as "low probability").
During the occurrence of the "special symbol high probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a second probability (hereinafter referred to as "high probability") higher than the first probability.
The main control circuit 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning a "hit"("big hit 1" to "big hit 10") in which a big hit gaming state occurs.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a set of a value (set value) set in the setting information storage area and a gaming state (special figure low probability state or special figure high probability state). Probability according to the lottery.
Specifically, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 319.69 while the set value = "1" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring. On the other hand, while the set value = "1" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, while the set value = "2" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, while the set value = "2" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, while the set value = "3" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, while the set value = "3" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 30.62.
On the other hand, while the set value = "4" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.93 while the set value = "4" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring.
On the other hand, while the set value = "5" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 291.27. On the other hand, while the set value = "5" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, while the set value = "6" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, while the set value = "6" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

If you win "Big hit 2" to "Big hit 5" or "Big hit 7", the "special figure low probability state" will be displayed in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the occurrence of the next big hit game state. Occurs.
On the other hand, when "big hit 1", "big hit 6" or "big hit 8" to "big hit 10" is won, a "special figure high probability state" is generated according to the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the "special figure high probability state" is started at the end of the big hit game state, and ends at the start of the next big hit game state (the end of the stop display of the "big hit symbol").
The "special figure high probability state" is started at the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state" is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 [ It may be configured to be terminated when the number of times]) is reached (a “special figure low probability state” is generated).
Further, when "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 10" are won, the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.
The time reduction control is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and the special symbol lottery has been won (the "big hit symbol" has been stopped and displayed), and the predetermined number of time reductions (70 [times] in this embodiment]. ) Is executed, and the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the special symbol is terminated.

(About control commands)
Next, a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and a control command transmitted and received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed in only one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and the communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 is composed of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the effect control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 include a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, a variation pattern specification command, a stop specification command, a game state specification command, and a number of holds. A designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead designation command, a third look-ahead designation command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol (lottery result of the special symbol lottery). The symbol type specification command specifies the type of stop symbol (one stop symbol number) of the special symbol. The symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variable mode specification command is a command for specifying the variable mode type (variable mode number). The variable mode specification command specifies the variable time associated with the variable mode number by specifying the variable mode number. The variation mode specification command specifies the variation time of the first half period (the mode of the first half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the type of the fluctuation mode, m (plurality) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variable mode designation command specifies one of m types of variable modes (variable mode number) (“variable mode m”).
The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time of the latter half period (the mode of the latter half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the types of fluctuation patterns, n (plural) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variation pattern specification command specifies one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode specification command and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating a stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop specification command is sent at the start of the stop display of the special symbol.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In the present embodiment, as the game state offset value, each combination of the time saving control flag value, the special figure high probability state flag value, the previous big hit symbol flag value, and the big hit after rotation speed counter value is used. The corresponding numerical value is set.
Then, the game state specification command specifies one game state offset value. The game state specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, or the like.
Here, as the game state offset value, the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, the value of the rotation speed counter after the jackpot, and the setting information storage area are stored. The configuration may be such that a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the set value (set value) is set. Then, when the game state designation command is transmitted, the value of the time saving control flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, and the number of rotations after the jackpot Check the value of the counter and the value stored in the setting information storage area, calculate the game state offset value corresponding to this confirmation result, and issue the game state specification command to specify the calculated game state offset value. , The configuration may be such that it is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 (transmitted to the effect control circuit 300).

The hold number specification command is a command for specifying the hold number. In the present embodiment, the hold number designation command specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1", the hold number has decreased by "1", the hold number, and the like. ..
Here, the "special figure 1 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device. Further, the “special figure 2 hold number” means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device.
The hold number specification command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, storing the start information, starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the like. In the present embodiment, as the hold number designation command, a command corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the jackpot game state). The opening designation command specifies the type of the jackpot game state to be started (one of "big hit 1" to "big hit 10"). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the jackpot game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of a round game. The round end designation command is sent at the end of the round game.
The ending specification command is a command that specifies the start of the ending period. The ending specification command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (one stop symbol number) of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the first look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that specifies the contents of the variable mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command has an indefinite type of variation mode (“indefinite value”), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”). ) Is specified. The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the start information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command has an indefinite type of fluctuation pattern (“indefinite value”), or one of n types of fluctuation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the start information is stored.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. When the payout control circuit 400 receives a control command from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. In the main control circuit 200, when a control command is received from the payout control circuit 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the prize ball payout operation is executed by the payout control circuit 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200 include the occurrence / cancellation of a payout error, the occurrence / cancellation of a full tank error, and the occurrence / cancellation of a ball jam error. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is sent when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed by the main control circuit 200)
Next, the process executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the hard random number generation circuit 270 starts the hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are within a predetermined range every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".
Further, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range every time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment). In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10066).
Then, the hard random number update process updates the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number, respectively. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.
Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400. The control command transmission process is started. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Each output port 0, 1, 4 includes a plurality of output terminals and a port register. Further, the port register is configured to include a bit (an area in which control data for designating output or stop is set) corresponding to each output terminal. Then, each output port 0, 1, 4 controls the output of the control signal from the output terminal corresponding to the bit according to the value of each bit included in the port register.
At this time, each output port 0, 1, 4 transmits a control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit when the value of the bit = "0" for each bit included in the port register. The low level is set (output is stopped), and when the value of the bit = "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is set to the high level (output).
Specifically, the output port 0 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each data signal for controlling the lighting of the main display 60. That is, the output port 0 has an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA0", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA1", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA2", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA3", and "SEGDATA4". An output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA5", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA6", and an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA7" are provided.
Further, the port register of the output port 0 includes a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA0", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA1", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA2", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA3", and "SEGDATA4". The corresponding bit, the bit corresponding to "SEGDATA5", the bit corresponding to "SEGDATA6", and the bit corresponding to "SEGDATA7" are included.
As a result, for example, when "0" is set as the bit value corresponding to "SEGDATA0" in the port register, the data signal ("SEGDATA0") output from the output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA0" is generated. It becomes a low level. On the other hand, when "1" is set as the bit value corresponding to "SEGDATA0" of the port register, the data signal ("SEGDATA0") output from the output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA0" is set to a high level. Become.

Further, the output port 1 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each common signal for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. That is, the output port 1 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to "COM0", an output terminal corresponding to "COM1", an output terminal corresponding to "COM2", and an output terminal corresponding to "COM3". Has been done.
Further, the port register of the output port 1 includes a bit corresponding to "COM0", a bit corresponding to "COM1", a bit corresponding to "COM2", and a bit corresponding to "COM3". ..
As a result, for example, when "0" is set as the value of the bit corresponding to "COM1" in the port register, the data signal ("COM1") output from the output terminal corresponding to "COM1" is generated. It becomes a low level. On the other hand, when "1" is set as the bit value corresponding to "COM1" of the port register, the data signal ("COM1") output from the output terminal corresponding to "COM1" is set to high level. Become.

Further, the output port 4 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each data signal for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61. That is, the output port 4 has an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA0", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA1", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA2", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA3", and "7SEGDATA4". An output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA5", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA6", and an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA7" are provided.
Further, the port register of the output port 4 has a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA0", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA1", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA2", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA3", and "7SEGDATA4". The corresponding bit, the bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA5", the bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA6", and the bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA7" are included.
As a result, for example, when "0" is set as the bit value corresponding to "7SEGDATA4" in the port register, the data signal ("7SEGDATA4") output from the output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA4" is generated. It becomes a low level. On the other hand, when "1" is set as the bit value corresponding to "7SEGDATA4" of the port register, the data signal ("SEGDATA0") output from the output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA4" is set to a high level. Become.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the boot program is read from the ROM 220 and the settings necessary for executing various processes are performed.
In step S1-2, the wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time is set in the timer counter. Then, the measurement of the wait processing time set by the timer counter is started. It also reads the RAM clear signal.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (see FIG. 44). Then, when the power is turned on while the ram clear switch is being pressed, the ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 1).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of steps S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, a process necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.
In step S1-5, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230, and if it is determined that "1" is set in the backup valid flag area (Yes), If it is determined in step S1-6 that "0" is set in the backup valid flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.

In step S1-6, the used area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-7. In the used area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-7, the unused area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the unused area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in steps S1-6 and S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area" and "step S1-. When both conditions of "the checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area" are satisfied. Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area" and "step S1-7". The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 2 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area. ”At least one of the conditions is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In steps S1-9, it is determined whether or not the ram clear signal is input based on the value read in step S1-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal), and the ram clear signal is generated. If it is determined that the signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S1-10, and if it is determined that the ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
In step S1-10, the backup valid flag release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the backup valid flag release process, "0" is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-11, the initialization process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the power restoration initialization process, the data to be initialized (cleared) in the RAM 230 when the power is restored (when the data before the power is cut off is maintained) is initialized.
In step S1-12, the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored, the subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) that specifies that the power has been restored is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. Further, the subcommand that specifies the value set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-13, the payout command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, the payout command (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) that specifies that the power has been cut off is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.

In step S1-14, the effect return subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect return subcommand transmission process, the effect return subcommands (power return phase designation command, game state designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the "power return phase designation command" is a control command for designating a special game phase for returning the effect.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. Then, the power return phase specification command for designating the confirmed special game phase is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In addition, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. Specifically, check the value of the time reduction control flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the jackpot. Then, the game state offset value corresponding to this confirmation result is calculated. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, the interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the interrupt initial setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, the set value change permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1).
In the setting value change permission process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting value change permission condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, "1" is set in the set value change permission flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, "0" is set in the set value change permission flag area of the RAM 230.
In the present embodiment, both "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the inner frame unit 3 is open (or the integrated door unit 4 is open)". When the condition of is satisfied, it is determined that the setting value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the inner frame unit 3 is open (or the integrated door unit 4 is open)". If the condition of is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting value change condition is not satisfied.
If both the "detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door opening information (external signal) is being output" are satisfied, the set value change condition is satisfied. Judgment is made, and it is set when at least one of the conditions of "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door opening information (external signal) is being output" is not satisfied. It may be configured to determine that the value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-17, the unused area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the unused area initialization process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the non-use area initialization process, the information stored in the non-use area M2 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the unused area M2 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are deleted.
In step S1-18, the used area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the used area initialization process, the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the used area initialization process, the information stored in the used area M1 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the used area M1 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are deleted.
That is, predetermined initial values are set as values of various flag areas (time reduction control flag area, special figure high probability state flag area, previous jackpot symbol area, special game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area, etc.). .. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as a value of various counter areas (time reduction counter area, after-hit rotation speed counter area, etc.). Further, a predetermined initial value (“3” in the present embodiment) is set in the setting information storage area.
In the present embodiment, when the checksum is not normal, the used area M1 is initialized after the unused area M2 is initialized. On the other hand, when the checksum is normal, the used area M1 is initialized only when the RAM clear signal is input.
As a result, as long as the checksum is normal, the unused area M2 is not initialized even if the RAM clear signal is input. Therefore, even when the RAM clear switch is operated, information on the base ratio (not used). Information stored in the area M2) can be maintained.

In step S1-19, the subcommand transmission process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, the subcommand that specifies that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Further, a subcommand that specifies a value (set value = "3") set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-20, the issue command transmission process at the time of RAM clear is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clearing payout command transmission process, the payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-16) shown in FIG. 6 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. 7. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and the end value of soft random numbers (hit symbol random numbers, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. Then, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, the main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, the subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt enable processing in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1, execution of the power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted. This is the interrupt enable period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the hit symbol random numbers (reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the evacuation process when the power is cut off, which is executed by the CPU 210, will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an evacuation process when the power is cut off.
A power supply cutoff detection circuit (not shown) is connected to the power supply circuit 600. Then, the power supply cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the main control circuit 200 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. ..
Upon receiving the power cutoff warning signal, the CPU 210 starts the power cutoff save process shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power-off time evacuation process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, is the power cutoff notice signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not (bit check) is performed and it is determined that the power cutoff warning signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4 and it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is not input. In (No), the process proceeds to step S3-14.

In step S3-4, the output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped. Further, the input of the detection signal to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In particular, in the output port stop processing, the values of all the bits included in the port registers of the output ports 0, 1 and 4 are initialized.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is stopped. That is, "0" is set as the value of each bit for all the bits (bits corresponding to each of "SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") included in the port register of the output port 0. As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) is stopped (low level).
Further, in the output port stop processing, the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 is stopped. That is, "0" is set as the value of each bit for all the bits (bits corresponding to each of "COM0" to "COM3") included in the port register of the output port 1. As a result, the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) is stopped (low level).
Further, in the output port stop processing, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is stopped. That is, "0" is set as the value of each bit for all the bits (bits corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") included in the port register of the output port 4. As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped (low level).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting of the main display 60 is controlled by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220. The control data (drive data) and the control data (drive data) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 are initialized.
Here, the control data for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is the control data for controlling the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) (specifically, the port of the output port 0). The value of each bit included in the register) and the control data for controlling the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) (specifically, each bit included in the port register of the output port 1). Value).
Further, the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is the control data for controlling the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) (specifically, the port register of the output port 4). (Value of each bit included in) and control data for controlling the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) (specifically, each bit included in the port register of the output port 1). Value).
As a result, the control data for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is processed based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 (described later). The process (step S3) based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) set by the main display data signal output process of step S30-5 and stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220. It is initialized by the output port stop process of -4 or the main display data signal clear process of step S30-1 described later.
On the other hand, the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is based on the program (program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. Processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) set by the processing (performance display device data signal output processing in step S37-4 described later) and stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220. It is initialized by (the output port stop processing in step S3-4 or the performance display device data signal clear processing in step S30-2 described later).
Here, in the output port stop processing, the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area described later is cleared (initialized), and the performance display device data signal control data described later is cleared. The performance display device data signal control data set in the setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S3-5, the used area checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the used area checksum saving process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, the unused area checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the unused area checksum storage process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-7, the backup enable flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the backup valid flag setting process, "1" is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-8, the RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as the RAM protect value in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the CPU 210 is prohibited from accessing the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230.

In step S3-9, the loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading the power cutoff warning signal is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-10, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-11. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-11, is the power cutoff notice signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-10 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-12, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes). Goes to step S3-9.
In step S3-12, the loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-13. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-13, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU If the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-10.
In step S3-14, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
The CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the interrupt request signal. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt processing is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enable process, interrupts are allowed.
In step S4-3, the set value management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The setting value management process will be described later.
In step S4-4, the dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. The dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-5, the port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the port input process, the latest switch status is accurately acquired.
Specifically, in the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, it is determined whether or not the on state of the detection signal has occurred based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each detection signal (each detection switch / detection sensor). Then, when it is determined that the ON state has occurred for each detection signal, the information indicating that the ON state has occurred (detected) for the detection signal is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 230.
Here, the "on state" means a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state in which the detection signal is input (high level).

In step S4-6, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-7, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. The initial value random number update process in step S4-7 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-8, the hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the hit symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-9, the switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the switch management process, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104 (whether or not the on state is detected) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-10, the addition number calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the addition number calculation process, a value to be added to the out-ball number counter described later and a value to be added to the payout number counter described later are calculated and set.
That is, in the addition number calculation process, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a predetermined gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the predetermined game state, the addition number calculation process in the non-predetermined game state, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined game state, the addition number calculation process in the predetermined game state, which will be described later, is executed.
In the present embodiment, when the "special figure low probability state" is occurring and the time saving control is stopped, it is determined that the gaming state is predetermined. On the other hand, if at least one of the conditions of the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state" and the execution of the time saving control are satisfied, it is determined that the game is not in the predetermined gaming state.

In the non-predetermined game state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out-ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared.
Next, in the out-ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230, "0" is set as a value to be added to the out-ball number counter.
Next, in the payout number addition value storage area of the RAM 230, "0" is set as a value to be added to the payout number counter.

On the other hand, in the predetermined game state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out-ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared. Further, "0" is set as the value of the counter for calculating the number of payouts.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is not detected, "0" is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected, the winning ball is paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54 at the value of the payout number calculation counter. Add the number "10". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 has not been detected, the addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected, the value of the payout number calculation counter is paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the left other winning opening 55 to 57. Add "10", which is the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 has not been detected, the addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the prize ball is paid out to the value of the payout number calculation counter according to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51. Add the number "3". If it is determined that the ON state of the start port switch 101 has not been detected, the addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the prize ball is paid out to the value of the payout number calculation counter according to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. Add the number "1". If it is determined that the ON state of the start port switch 102 has not been detected, the addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, in the payout number addition value storage area of the RAM 230, the value of the payout number calculation counter is set as the value to be added to the payout number counter.

In step S4-11, the special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-12, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the ordinary game management process, the operation of the normal drawing display device and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, the error management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined and settings are made according to the determination results.
In step S4-14, the winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each switch 101-103, 105, 106 is executed.
In step S4-15, the payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-14, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the large winning opening 53 and the number of ball game balls entered in the right other winning opening 54 are stored. The prize ball control counter 2, the upper left, middle left, lower left, etc. The prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of ball games that have entered the winning openings 55 to 57, and the ball game balls that have entered the first starting port 51 A prize ball control counter 4 for storing the number of ball games and a prize ball control counter 5 for storing the number of ball games that have entered the second starting port 52 are set.

Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, when the payout control circuit 400 completes the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (3 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (1 [ball] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

In step S4-16, the launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the launch position designation management process, the process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is specified to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is specified (at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.). In addition, a subcommand that specifies the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

In step S4-17, the external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, as external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer 450 or a data display device), symbol confirmation count information (OUT1), start port information (OUT2), and jackpot Information (OUT3 to OUT6), security information, out-lot payout number information (OUT8), information during setting value change, and the like are specified.
The "design fixed number information" is external information regarding the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol confirmation count information to the hall computer 450 (or a data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting ports 51 and 52. Each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer 450 (or a data display device). ..
The "big hit information" is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control circuit 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer 450 (or a data display device) each time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "out port payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-port payout number information to the hall computer 450 every time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "setting value changing information" is external information indicating that the setting value is being changed (the setting value change permission condition is satisfied). The CPU 210 always outputs an external signal corresponding to the setting value changing information to the hall computer 450 during the period in which "1" is set in the set value changing flag area.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the fixed number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the confirmation count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the fixed number counter for external information. As a result, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the start port entry count counter for external information. As a result, the starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the jackpot count counter for external information. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the out-ball number counter for external information. As a result, the out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting value changing flag area. Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the set value changing flag area, the set value changing information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the setting value changing information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.

In step S4-18, the test signal management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal management process is a process based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified by the game machine rules. That is, the test signal management process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.) is input to the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Remember in.
In step S4-19, the performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-20, the LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, control data (drive data) for controlling lighting of a predetermined display device is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-21, the solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-22, the port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 450, the solenoids 64, 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 450. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the set value management process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value management process.
When the set value management process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the set value change permission flag area, and when it is determined that "1" is set in the set value change permission flag area (Yes). Moves to step S29-2, and when it is determined that "0" is set in the set value change permission flag area (No), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S4-4). ).
In step S29-2, it is determined whether or not the set value change permission condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-3 and the set value is set. If it is determined that the change permission condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S29-6.
As described above, both "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the inner frame unit 3 is open (or the integrated door unit 4 is open)". If the condition of is satisfied, it is determined that the setting value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the inner frame unit 3 is open (or the integrated door unit 4 is open)". If the condition of is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting value change condition is not satisfied.
If both "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door opening information (external signal) is being output" are satisfied, the set value change condition is satisfied. If at least one of "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door opening information (external signal) is being output" is not satisfied. , It may be configured to determine that the set value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S29-3, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112, and if it is determined that the detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112 (Yes), step S29 When the process proceeds to -4 and it is determined that the detection signal has not been input from the set value selection switch 112 (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4).
In step S29-4, the set value change process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the setting value changing process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. Here, in the present embodiment, each time a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112, a predetermined order (for example, set value = "1", set value = "2", set value = "3", setting The set value is changed by the value = "4", the set value = "5", the set value = "6", the set value = "1", the set value = "2" ...).
In step S29-5, the set value display update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the set value display update process, the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the setting value display update process, first, a subcommand that specifies a value (set value after the change) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In the set value display update process, next, the same value as the value set in the setting information storage area (the set value after the change) is set in the set value display counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the set value display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the set value display counter is controlled to be lit.
In the present embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 62 only during the period when the setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In step S29-6, the set value change end process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4).
In the set value change end process, "0" is set in the set value change permission flag area. In addition, the value of the set value display counter is initialized (cleared). As a result, all the segments constituting the set value display device 62 are turned off (the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 ends).

Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-4 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
The dynamic port output process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the dynamic port output processing is processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-4, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, the main display data signal clearing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the main display data signal clearing process, the values of all the bits included in the port register of the output port 0 are initialized.
Specifically, in the main display data signal clear processing, "0" is set as the value of each bit for all the bits (bits corresponding to "SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") included in the port register of the output port 0. Set.
As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) is stopped (low level).
Here, in the main display data signal clearing process, the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S30-2, the performance display device data signal clearing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data signal clearing process, the values of all the bits included in the port register of the output port 4 are initialized.
Specifically, in the performance display device data signal clear processing, "0" is set as the value of each bit for all the bits (bits corresponding to "7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") included in the port register of the output port 4. Set.
As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped (low level).
Here, in the performance display device data signal clear processing, the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S30-3, the common signal update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the common signal update process, the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area is updated.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is configured to include a common signal control data setting area in which common signal control data is set (stored).
The common signal control data is information for controlling the output / stop of each common signal (each of "COM0" to "COM3").
In the present embodiment, "common signal control data 1" to "common signal control data 4" are defined as common signal control data.
The "common signal control data 1" is data that specifies the output of "COM0" among "COM0" to "COM3" and specifies the stop of the output of "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3". There is.
The "common signal control data 2" is data that specifies the output of "COM1" among "COM0" to "COM3" and specifies the stop of the output of "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3". There is.
The "common signal control data 3" is data that specifies the output of "COM2" among "COM0" to "COM3" and specifies the stop of the output of "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3". There is.
The "common signal control data 4" is data that specifies the output of "COM3" among "COM0" to "COM3" and specifies the stop of the output of "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2". There is.
Then, in the common signal update process, one common signal control data among the "common signal control data 1" to "common signal control data 4" is set as the common signal control data setting area. At this time, each time the common signal update process is executed, a predetermined order (for example, "common signal control data 1", "common signal control data 2", "common signal control data 3", "common signal control data 4") , "Common signal control data 1", "Common signal control data 2" ...), The common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area is changed.
As a result, each time the common signal update process is executed, the output is performed in a predetermined order (for example, "COM0", "COM1", "COM2", "COM3", "COM0", "COM1" ...). Common signal (common signal to be high level) is switched.

In step S30-4, the common signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the common signal output process, the output of each common signal (each of "COM0" to "COM3") by the output port 1 is controlled according to the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area.
Specifically, in the common signal output processing, each bit ("COM0" to "COM3") included in the port register of the output port 1 according to the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area. Set the value of the bit) corresponding to.
As a result, for each bit included in the port register of the output port 1, when the value of the bit = "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to a high level. When the value of the bit = "0", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled at a low level.

In step S30-5, the main display data signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-6. In the main display data signal output processing, according to the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area, each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) by the output port 0 Control the output.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 includes a main display data signal control data setting area in which main display data signal control data is set (stored).
Here, the main display data signal control data includes the value of the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device described later, the value of the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device described later, and the value described later. It is configured to include the value of the normal figure display symbol counter.
Then, in the main display data signal output processing, each bit (“SEGDATA0”) included in the port register of the output port 0 is according to the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area. ~ Set the value of (bit) corresponding to each of "SEGDATA7".
In the present embodiment, the control data set in the port register of the output port 0 (included in the port register of the output port 0) based on the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area. Select / acquire control data) that specifies the value to be set for each bit. Then, the selected / acquired control data is set in the port register of the output port 0.
As a result, for each bit included in the port register of the output port 0, when the value of the bit = "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to a high level. When the value of the bit = "0", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled at a low level.

In step S30-6, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-7. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S30-7, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-8. In the register save process, the value of the flag register is saved in the RAM save area.
In step S30-8, the performance display device output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-9. The performance display device output processing will be described later.
In step S30-9, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-10. In the register restoration process, the value of the flag register saved in step S30-7 is restored.
In step S30-10, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-5). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of evacuation processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

Next, the performance display device output in step S30-8 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S30-8, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, the stack pointer save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-2. In the stack pointer save process, the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 is saved in the RAM save area.
In step S37-2, the out-of-area stack pointer setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-2. In the out-of-area stack pointer setting process, the stack pointer used for the process based on the program stored in the out-of-use area m2 is set.
In step S37-3, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-4. In the register save processing, the value of the register used in the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 is saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S37-4, the performance display device data signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the performance display device data signal output processing, in accordance with the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) by the output port 4 Control the output.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is configured to include a performance display device data signal control data setting area in which performance display device data signal control data is set (stored).
Then, in the performance display device data signal output processing, each bit (“7SEGDATA0”) included in the port register of the output port 4 is determined according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area. ~ Set the value of (bit) corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA7".
In the present embodiment, the control data set in the port register of the output port 4 (included in the port register of the output port 4) based on the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area. Select / acquire control data) that specifies the value to be set for each bit. Then, the selected / acquired control data is set in the port register of the output port 4.
As a result, for each bit included in the port register of the output port 4, when the value of the bit = "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to a high level. When the value of the bit = "0", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled at a low level.

In step S37-5, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-6. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S37-3 (the value of the register used in the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) is restored.
In step S37-6, the stack pointer return process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S30-9). In the stack pointer return process, the stack pointer value saved in step S37-1 (the stack pointer value used in the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) is returned.

Next, the switch management process in step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-9, first, as shown in FIG. 13, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2 and the gate If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, the normal drawing start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected (Yes), step S5-3 is performed. If it is determined in S5-4 that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected (Yes), step S5-5 is performed. If it is determined in S5-6 that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), a series of processes are completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). To do.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). Special Figure 2 The starting ball detection process will be described later.

Next, the normal drawing start ball detection process of step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing start ball detection process.
When the normal figure start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, the normal figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal figure random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (“1” in the present embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5-). Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the normal figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal figure hold number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the normal figure hold number counter is newly set in the normal figure hold number counter.
In step S6-4, the normal figure random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the hit random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure start information storage area of the RAM 230 as the normal figure start information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, first, as shown in FIG. 15, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, the special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
In step S7-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter is set in the hold number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, first, as shown in FIG. 16, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
In step S8-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter in FIG. 2 is set in the hold number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, the special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold). Acquire (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).
In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes are performed. Is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, the special figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area. A value obtained by adding "1" to the counter is newly set in the special figure hold count counter.

In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) in the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start) of the RAM 230. It is stored in the information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area).
Specifically, the RAM 230 has a variable start information storage area in which the start information during execution of the notification display of the special symbol is stored, and a special figure 1 in which the start determination is reserved. It is configured to include a start information storage area and a special figure 2 start information storage area in which a start determination is reserved.
The special figure 1 start information storage area is configured to include the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the special figure 1 start information. The first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are defined with different priorities. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. .. Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is executed in order from the special figure 1 start information stored in the storage unit having a higher priority.
The special figure 2 start information storage area is configured to include the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the special figure 2 start information. The first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are defined with different priorities. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. .. Then, the start determination of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is executed in order from the special figure 2 start information stored in the storage unit having a higher priority.
Then, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 1 start information as the special diagram. 1 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage unit having the highest priority among the vacant storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special diagram 2 starting information. 2 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage unit having the highest priority among the vacant storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.

In step S9-7, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 hold has increased by "1". Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is executed by the RAM 230. Stored in the subcommand output request buffer of.

In step S9-8, the pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S4-10 or S5-5). In the preliminary determination process, the start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure) stored (stored) in the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area) in step S9-6. 2 Various lottery results are pre-determined based on the start information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination start information").
In the present embodiment, various lottery results are preliminarily determined for all the start information (special figure 1 start information and special figure 2 start information).
The start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed. Further, regarding the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 starting information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control is not executed. The above may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the pre-determination process, first, the pre-special figure winning determination process is executed.
In the pre-special figure winning judgment process, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit” or “missing”) is judged (pre-special figure winning judgment).
The ROM 220 stores a special figure winning lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as the special figure winning lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of the set value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special drawing winning lottery table and is stored.
Specifically, as the special figure winning lottery table, "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", and "set value 2 low probability special figure winning special""Figure winning lottery table", "Set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Setting value 3 Low accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Setting value 3 High accuracy special figure winning lottery table""Set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 4 "5 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "set value 6 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table", and "set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table" are stored.

In the "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "1" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "204" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "1" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 1 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "0" to "2039" among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "209" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 2 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2089" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "3" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "214" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "3" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 3 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2139" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "4" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "219" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "4" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 4 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "0" to "2189" among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "224" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 5 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "0" to "2239" among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 6 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "6" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "229" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 6 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "6" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 6 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "0" to "2289" among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as big hit values.

In the advance special figure winning judgment process, the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. Then, the special figure winning lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment start information and the read special figure winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (preliminary special figure winning judgment). ..
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit". Judged as (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol The result of the lottery is judged to be "outlier" (lost).

In the pre-determination process, next, the pre-special figure stop symbol determination is executed. In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
In this embodiment, five types (“big hit 1 symbol” to “big hit 5 symbols”) are defined as the types of “big hit symbols” corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. In addition, five types ("big hit 6 symbols" to "big hit 10 symbols") are set as the types of "big hit symbols" corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
Then, 50 kinds of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 1 symbol". In addition, 20 kinds of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 2 symbols". In addition, five types of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 3 symbols". In addition, 10 types of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 4 symbols". Fifteen "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 5 symbols".
As a result, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, there is a 50% probability that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state will be the "special symbol low probability state" (specifically, the jackpot symbol). , "Big hit 1 symbol") is selected, and there is a 50% chance that the game state after the end of the big hit game state will be the "special figure high probability state" (specifically, "big hit 2 symbols"). "-" Big hit 5 symbols ") is selected.
On the other hand, 20 kinds of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 6 symbols". In addition, 50 kinds of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 7 symbols". In addition, 15 types of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 8 symbols". In addition, 10 types of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 9 symbols". Five types of "big hit symbols" are defined as "big hit symbols" (stop symbol numbers) belonging to "big hit 10 symbols".
As a result, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, there is a 50% probability that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state will be the "special symbol low probability state" (specifically, the jackpot symbol). , "Big hit 7 symbols") is selected, and there is a 50% chance that the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be the "special figure high probability state" (specifically, "big hit 6 symbols"). , "Big hit 8 symbols" to "Big hit 10 symbols") are selected.

The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit symbol") is registered.
Further, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.
Then, in the big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the stop symbol numbers corresponding to "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 5 symbols" are registered as stop symbol numbers. On the other hand, in the big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the stop symbol numbers corresponding to "big hit 6 symbols" to "big hit 10 symbols" are registered as stop symbol numbers.
In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the pre-special symbol winning determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, when the pre-determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, it is based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. , Determine the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number). On the other hand, when the pre-determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the jackpot symbol is based on the hit symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. Type (stop symbol number) is determined.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the pre-special symbol winning determination, the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) is "missing symbol"("missingsymbol"). The stop symbol number corresponding to "" is determined (preliminary special symbol stop symbol determination).

In the pre-determination process, the first look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the first look-ahead designation command setting process, the first look-ahead designation command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the prior special symbol stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-judgment process, next, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" (winning) is determined by the pre-special figure winning determination.
Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (winning) is determined by the pre-special figure winning determination, the pre-special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-special figure has been won or lost, the pre-special figure fluctuation state determination process is executed.

In the pre-winning pre-special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (pre-winning pre-variation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode type (variation mode number) is registered.
In addition, as a winning variation mode determination table, the type of big hit symbol ("big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 10 symbol"), the game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", time saving counter The winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the combination of (value, etc.) and is stored.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the types of fluctuation modes (variation mode number), "variation without pseudo-ream", "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation", and "pseudo-ream 4 fluctuation" are used. Is stipulated.
Further, as a fluctuation mode (variation pattern number) belonging to "pseudo-continuous variation", a plurality of fluctuation modes (variation pattern number) in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are defined.
The degree of expectation of each type belongs to the types belonging to "pseudo-ream 4 fluctuation", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation", "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation", and "pseudo-reamless fluctuation" in order from the one with the highest expectation (high expectation → Expectations are low).
The "expectation degree" means the possibility (degree) that a big hit game state occurs when the type of the fluctuation mode is selected.
Then, in each winning variation mode determination table, "pseudo-ream 2 variation", "pseudo-ream 3 variation", and "pseudo-ream 4 variation" are registered as the type of variation mode (variation mode number). ("Pseudo-reamless variation" is not registered).

In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning, first, the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination and the game state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", Check the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) and read the winning fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read-out variation mode determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-winning special figure change mode determination process, the second look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the second look-ahead designation command setting process, the second look-ahead designation command that specifies the type (variation mode number) of the fluctuation mode determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-winning pre-special figure variation mode determination process, next, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is registered.
In addition, the type of jackpot symbol ("big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 10 symbol"), the game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", time reduction counter value, etc.), and the variable mode. The winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the type and combination of is stored.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, "variation without reach", "normal reach variation", and "super reach variation" are defined as the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number).
Further, as a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) belonging to "variation without reach", a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are defined.
Further, as a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation", a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are defined.
Further, as a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) belonging to "super reach fluctuation", a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are defined.
In the present embodiment, as fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern numbers) belonging to "super reach variation", "super reach variation 1", "super reach variation 2", "super reach variation 3", and "super reach variation 4""And" Super Reach Fluctuation 5 "are stipulated.
The degree of expectation for each type is stipulated to be "super reach fluctuation", "normal reach fluctuation", and "variation without reach" (high expectation → low expectation) in descending order of expectation.
In addition, the degree of expectation of each fluctuation pattern belonging to "super reach fluctuation" is "super reach fluctuation 5", "super reach fluctuation 4", "super reach fluctuation 3", "super reach fluctuation" in order from the one with the highest expectation. It is stipulated to be "2" and "super reach fluctuation 1" (high expectation → low expectation).
The "expectation degree" means the possibility (degree) that a big hit game state occurs when the type of the fluctuation pattern is selected.
Then, in each winning variation pattern determination table, "normal reach variation" and "super reach variation" are registered as the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) ("variation without reach" is registered. Not).

In the pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination, first, the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination, and the game state (“special symbol high probability state” or “special symbol low probability state”, (Value of time reduction counter, etc.) and the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination are confirmed, and the winning fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-winning special figure change mode determination process, the third look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the third look-ahead designation command setting process, the third look-ahead designation command for designating the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern determined by the pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the pre-selection change mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the pre-determination start information is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In the present embodiment, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
The "indefinite value" means that the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined when the start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) is acquired (memorized). However, at the start of the variation display of the special symbol based on the start information (when the step S11-7 is executed), the variation is based on the number of reservations (the number of reservations of special figure 1 or the number of reservations of special figure 2) at that time. The type of mode (variable mode number) and the type of variable pattern (variable pattern number) are determined.
The "fixed value" is the acquisition of start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) regardless of the number of holds at the start of the variable display of the special symbol (at the time of executing step S11-7). At the time of storage) (when the step S9-8 is executed), the type of the fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated in the range of "0" to "10006". Of "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-determination start information, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value" and the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is determined. When the value is "8500" or more, it is determined as "fixed value".

In the pre-selection variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, when a "fixed value" is determined by the pre-random number type determination, the pre-reach group determination and the pre-selection pre-variation mode determination are further executed.
On the other hand, in the pre-selection variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, when the pre-random number type determination determines "indefinite value", the pre-reach group determination and the pre-selection pre-variation mode determination are not executed.
In the pre-reach group determination, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between a reach mode random number and a reach group type (reach group number) is registered.
Further, as the reach group determination table, an indefinite value reach group determination table and a fixed value reach group determination table are stored.
In the present embodiment, "reach group 1", "reach group 2", and "reach group 3" are defined as the types of reach groups.
Then, in the reach group determination table for indefinite value, only "reach group 1" is registered as the type of reach group ("reach group 2" and "reach group 3" are not registered).
On the other hand, in the fixed value reach group determination table, only "reach group 2" and "reach group 3" are registered as the types of reach groups ("reach group 1" is not registered).
As described above, the pre-reach group determination is executed only when the pre-random number type determination determines a “fixed value”.
In the pre-reach group determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.

In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a loss mode fluctuation mode determination table in which correspondence between the reach mode random number and the fluctuation mode type (variation mode number) is registered.
In addition, as the defeated fluctuation mode determination table, the "defeated variation mode determination table 1" corresponding to "reach group 1", the "defeated variation mode determination table 2" corresponding to "reach group 2", and the "reach". The "variable mode determination table 3 at the time of defeat" corresponding to the "group 3" is stored.
Further, as the "variation mode determination table 1 at the time of defeat", it corresponds to each combination of the number of holds (the number of holds in special figure 1 or the number of holds in special figure 2) and the execution status of the time saving control (during or stopped). The "variable mode determination table 1 at the time of defeat" is stored.

Then, in the "variation mode determination table 1 at the time of defeat", only "variation without pseudo-ream" is registered as the type of variation mode (variation mode number) ("pseudo-ream 2 variation", "pseudo-ream 3 variation". "And" Pseudo-ream 4 fluctuations "are not registered).
In addition, the contents of the "variation mode determination table 1 at the time of defeat" corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the type of change mode (variation mode number) related to the shorter change time is selected as the number of holds increases. There is.
In the "variation mode determination table 2 at the time of defeat", "pseudo-ream 2 variation", "pseudo-ream 3 variation", and "pseudo-ream 4 variation" are registered as the type of variation mode (variation mode number). ("Pseudo-reamless variation" is not registered).
In the "variation mode determination table 3 at the time of defeat", "pseudo-ream 2 variation", "pseudo-ream 3 variation", and "pseudo-ream 4 variation" are registered as the type of variation mode (variation mode number). ("Pseudo-reamless variation" is not registered).

As described above, the pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat is executed only when it is determined to be a "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination.
In the pre-decision pre-variation mode determination, first, the type of the reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeat variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read-out variation mode determination table at the time of defeat.

In the pre-selection change mode determination process at the time of defeat, the second look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the second look-ahead designation command setting process, when it is determined as a "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination, the second variation mode type (variation mode number) determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat is specified. The look-ahead designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be an "indefinite value" by the prior random number type determination, the second look-ahead designation command for specifying the "indefinite value" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-selection variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, when a "fixed value" is determined by the pre-random number type determination, the pre-selection variation pattern determination is further executed.
On the other hand, in the pre-selection variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, when the pre-random number type determination determines "indefinite value", the pre-selection variation pattern determination is not executed.
In the pre-decision pattern determination, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of defeat in which the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number) is registered.
In addition, as the loss pattern determination table, the "loss pattern determination table 1" corresponding to "reach group 1", the "loss pattern determination table 2" corresponding to "reach group 2", and the "reach" The "variation pattern determination table 3 for defeat" corresponding to the "group 3" is stored.
Further, as the "variation pattern determination table 1 at the time of defeat", it corresponds to each combination of the number of holds (the number of holds in special figure 1 or the number of holds in special figure 2) and the execution status of the time saving control (during or stopped). The "variation pattern determination table 1 at the time of defeat" is stored.

Then, only "variation without reach" is registered as the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the "variation pattern determination table 1 at the time of defeat"("normal reach variation" and "super reach variation" are registered. Not).
Further, as the number of holds increases, the content of the "variation pattern determination table 1 at the time of defeat" corresponding to each number of holds is set so that the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) related to the shorter fluctuation time is selected. There is.
Only "normal reach variation" is registered as the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the "variation pattern determination table 2 at the time of defeat"("variation without reach" and "super reach variation" are not registered. ).
Only "super reach variation" is registered as the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the "variation pattern determination table 3 at the time of defeat"("variation without reach" and "normal reach variation" are not registered. ). It should be noted that "Super Reach 5" is not registered in the "Fluctuation pattern determination table 3 at the time of defeat".

As described above, the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of defeat is executed only when it is determined as a "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination.
In the pre-defeat variation pattern determination, first, the type of the reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeat variation pattern determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

Next, in the pre-selection change mode determination process at the time of defeat, the third look-ahead designation command setting process is executed.
In the third look-ahead designation command setting process, when a "fixed value" is determined by the pre-random number type determination, the third type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern determined by the pre-selection variation pattern determination at the time of defeat is specified. The look-ahead designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the "indefinite value" is determined by the prior random number type determination, the third look-ahead designation command for specifying the "indefinite value" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is a "fixed value", the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined. The second and third look-ahead designation commands for designating the determined fluctuation mode type and fluctuation pattern type are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.
On the other hand, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-judgment start information is an "indefinite value", the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are not determined. , The second and third look-ahead designation commands for designating the "indefinite value" are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the special game management process of step S4-11 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as the phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery, "special figure change waiting state", "Special figure changing state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "Large winning opening opening state", "Large winning opening opening control state", "Large winning opening closing effective state" and "Large winning opening opening end" Seven "wait states" are specified.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (execution) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, the special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-11, first, as shown in FIG. 18, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the "special figure changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the special figure changing process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stopped symbol display state", the special figure stopped processing described later is started. If it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening state", the large winning opening pre-opening process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state", it will be described later. When the large winning opening opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the "large winning opening closing effective state", the large winning opening closing effective processing described later is started and the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set. If it is the corresponding value, the large winning opening opening end wait process described later is started.

Next, the special figure change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (No). Goes to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes), it goes to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). In step S11-3, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold count counter is not "1" or more (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-12) is completed. ).

In step S11-3, the special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area and special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230 is used. The start information of one of the information and the special figure 2 start information) is selected as the judgment start information.
In the present embodiment, the start determination of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is prioritized over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. (Special figure winning judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) is executed.
Therefore, when one or more special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the earliest of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. What is acquired (stored) in is selected as the determination start information. That is, the special figure 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is acquired (stored) first. ) Is selected as the determination start information. That is, the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) is updated.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 start information is used as the judgment start information, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 1 hold number. Set to the counter.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is used as the judgment start information, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set in the special figure 2 hold number counter. To do.
Next, the storage area of the determination start information is changed (shifted) from the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area) to the changing start information storage area.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 start information is used as the determination start information, the special figure 2 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is displayed. Stores (shifts) in the start information storage area during fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 2 start information is stored in the second to fourth storage units of the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start information stored in each storage unit is used. The storage unit is stored (shifted) in a storage unit having a higher priority than the storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 start information is used as the judgment start information, the special figure 1 start information (judgment start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is started during fluctuation. Store (shift) in the information storage area. Further, when the special figure 1 start information is stored in the second to fourth storage units of the special figure 1 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in each storage unit is used. The storage unit is stored (shifted) in a storage unit having a higher priority than the storage unit.

In step S11-4, the special figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special drawing winning determination).
In the special figure winning judgment process, the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area and the current game state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. , Read the special figure winning lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and the read special figure winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (special figure winning determination).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit" ( Winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol lottery The result of is judged as "outlier" (lost).

In step S11-5, the special figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) of the special symbol is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the special symbol winning determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, when the start information is the special figure 1 start information, the big hit symbol is based on the hit symbol random number included in the determination start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. Type (stop symbol number) is determined. On the other hand, when the judgment start information is the special figure 2 start information, the type of the big hit symbol is based on the hit symbol random number included in the judgment start information and the big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. (Stop symbol number) is determined.
On the other hand, in the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the special symbol winning judgment, the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number) is changed to "missing symbol"("missingsymbol"). The corresponding stop symbol number) is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is then stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-6, the symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for specifying the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation mode and type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" (winning) is determined by the special figure winning determination. Then, when it is determined by the special figure winning determination that the "big hit" (winning) is determined, the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined by the special figure winning determination that it is "missing" (lost), the special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of losing is executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation mode determination, the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination, the game state (“special symbol high probability state” or “special symbol low probability state”, and the value of the time reduction counter Etc.) and, and read out the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read-out variation mode determination table at the time of winning.
In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation pattern judgment, the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination, the game state (“special symbol high probability state” or “special symbol low probability state”, and the value of the time reduction counter Etc.) and the type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the variation mode determination at the time of winning are confirmed, and the variation pattern determination table at the time of winning corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

On the other hand, in the special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the determination start information is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is "8500". If it is the above, it is determined as "fixed value".
Next, in the special figure change mode determination process at the time of defeat, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, when the random number type determination determines a “fixed value”, the fixed value reach group determination table is read out. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "indefinite value" by the random number type determination, the reach group determination table for indefinite value is read out. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read reach group determination table for indefinite value.
In the special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of defeat).
In the defeated fluctuation mode determination, when the random number type determination determines a "fixed value", the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeated fluctuation mode determination corresponding to this confirmation result is performed. Read the table. Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read-out variation mode determination table at the time of defeat.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be an "indefinite value" by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of holdings (the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 or the number of holdings in Special Figure 2), and the time reduction control Check the execution status (running or stopped) of, and read the change mode judgment table at the time of defeat corresponding to this confirmation result. Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read-out variation mode determination table at the time of defeat.
In the special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of defeat).
In the loss pattern determination, if the random number type determination determines a "fixed value", the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the loss pattern determination corresponding to this confirmation result is performed. Read the table. Then, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be an "indefinite value" by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of holdings (the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 or the number of holdings in Special Figure 2), and the time reduction control Check the execution status (running or stopped) of, and read out the variation pattern judgment table at the time of defeat corresponding to this confirmation result. Then, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat.

In step S11-8, the variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, the variation mode specification command for specifying the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time (hereinafter, referred to as “variation time 1”) corresponding to the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Further, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the acquired fluctuation time 1 and fluctuation time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-10, the special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device is lit and controlled.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-11, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the hold number designation command for specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. When the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the hold number designation command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the processing during the special figure change executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S12-3, the special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special figure variation display data update process, the data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device.

In step S12-4, the special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 1 display device. .. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device is lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device is lit (stop display).
In step S12-5, the special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, the stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the fixed number counter for external information.
In step S12-7, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure stopped processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing while the special figure is stopped.
When the special figure stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S13-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S13-2, when it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "big hit symbol" (stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit symbol") and it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "big hit symbol" (No). Goes to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the stop symbol is a "big hit symbol" (Yes), it goes to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed, and if it is determined that the time saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4 and the time saving control is being executed. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, if "1" is set, it is determined that the time saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, the time saving control is executed. Judge that it is not inside.

In step S13-4, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the time reduction counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (Yes), "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time reduction control is stopped). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the state in which "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (the state in which the time reduction control is executed is maintained). ..
In step S13-5, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "big hit symbol" (each stop symbol number). Then, in each special electric service control table, the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and the control data (solenoid) corresponding to each opening / closing switching are displayed. Control data, control time data), etc. are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table corresponding to the "big hit symbol" (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read special electric service control table is used as the special electric power of the RAM 230. Set in the role control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-8, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for designating the "big hit symbol" (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [sphere] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the jackpot count counter for external information.
In step S13-10, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S14-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening open control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching count counter is “0” (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S14-6) Or shift to S16-4).
In step S15-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the large winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

Next, the large winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening control process.
When the large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S16-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S16-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, the process of ending the large winning opening control is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the large winning opening opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the power stop is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, the large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special electric service control table area set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric service control table is set to set a predetermined large prize opening closing effective time (interval time) in the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closed effective state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening closing effective process.
When the large winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, first, as shown in FIG. 25, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S17-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No). ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made. ..
In step S17-3, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a wait process for opening the opening of the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S18-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, the game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag of the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol). At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is "1 jackpot symbol", "6 jackpot symbol" or "8 jackpot symbol" to "10 jackpot symbol", "1" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. To set. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbol" to "big hit 5 symbol" or "big hit 7 symbol", "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined number of time reductions (70 [times] in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter. Further, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal game management process of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
Here, in the present embodiment, as a phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game phase") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game") executed based on the ordinary symbol lottery, "waiting for change in ordinary figure". "State", "Floating state of normal figure", "Stop symbol display state of normal figure", "State before opening of electric accessory of normal figure", "Control state of opening of electric accessory of normal figure", "Closed of electric accessory of normal figure" Seven states are specified: "state" and "normal figure electric accessory opening end wait state".
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (execution) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-12, first, as shown in FIG. 27, the process proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.
In step S19-3, the normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state", the normal map fluctuation waiting process described later is started, and the "normal map changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the process during normal map change described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal figure stop symbol display state", the process during normal map stop described later is started. When the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening pre-opening state", the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory opening control state". , The ordinary electric accessory opening control process described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory closing effective state", the ordinary electric accessory closing effective process described later is started and the "ordinary electric accessory closing effective state" is started. When the value corresponds to the "object release end wait state", the normal electric accessory release end wait process described later is started.

Next, the normal map fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the normal map fluctuation waiting process.
When the normal figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). , Step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not "1" or more (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). To do.
In step S20-2, the process of updating the number of reserved numbers is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the normal figure hold number update process, the normal figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map hold number update process, one of the normal map start information stored in the normal map start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as the determination start information.
In the present embodiment, among the normal map start information stored in the normal map start information storage area, the earliest acquired (stored) normal map start information is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, the normal figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning judgment process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is judged (normal figure winning judgment).
The ROM 220 stores a regular drawing winning lottery table in which winning prices for ordinary symbol lottery are registered. Further, as the normal drawing winning lottery table, a general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and a general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped are stored.
In the general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the second probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) higher than the first probability. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning judgment process, the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (during execution or stop) of the time saving control is used as a basis for the winning random number included in the judgment start information. Execute the judgment.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" (lost).

In step S20-4, the normal figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "hit" (winning) by the normal symbol winning judgment, "normal symbol per symbol" is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the normal symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) of a normal symbol is determined (normal map fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is used as the normal map fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern. To judge.

In step S20-6, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, the normal map variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal map fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal figure display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
When the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure display timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- When the process shifts to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S21-3, the normal map variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal map fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure variation display data update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is newly set in the normal figure display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, the normal figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, the normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process of stopping the normal drawing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing while the normal drawing is stopped.
When the normal-figure stopped processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S22-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "normal symbol per symbol", and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "normal symbol per symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. Then, when it is determined (Yes) that the stop symbol is a “normal symbol per symbol”, the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, the ordinary electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, in each ordinary electric service control table, the time before the ordinary electric service is opened, the normal electric service closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of times of opening / closing switching, and the control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data) etc. are specified.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read ordinary electric service control table is stored in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of open / close switching is read out with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the normal electric service open / close switching counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter.

In step S22-5, the time setting process before opening the normal electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric service opening time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service opening time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening pretreatment executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S23-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S23-2, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, first, as shown in FIG. 32, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S23-3). Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, the ordinary electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 33, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S25-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S25-5, and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).

In step S25-5, the normal electric service release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric service release control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the power stop is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normally electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, the normal electric service closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric service closing effective time setting process, a predetermined ordinary electric service closing effective time is set in the ordinary game timer with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed effective state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S26-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the release end wait time setting process, a predetermined release end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 35, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S27-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-19 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-19, the process proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, the stack pointer save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the stack pointer save process, the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 is saved in the RAM save area.
In step S28-2, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the register save processing, the value of the register used in the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 is saved in the save area of the RAM.
In step S28-3, the number of balls addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4.
In the ball number addition process, the value stored in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the out ball number counter.
Next, the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the payout number counter.
In step S28-4, the base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. The base ratio calculation process will be described later.

In step S28-5, the performance display device display process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the performance display device display process, control data for displaying the base ratio is set in the performance display device 61.
Specifically, in the performance display device display process, in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, the base ratio calculated in step S38-4 (the current base ratio of the current section) or step S38-2. Set the performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio (final base ratio of the previous section) saved in.
As a result, according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, the performance display device 61 has the current base ratio of the current section or the final of the previous section. The base ratio is displayed.
At this time, in the performance display device 61, the current base ratio of the current section and the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals so that the current base ratio of the current section is displayed alternately. The performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio and the performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately set at predetermined time intervals.

In step S28-6, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S28-2 (the register value used in the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) is restored.
In step S28-7, the stack pointer return process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-20). In the stack pointer return process, the value of the stack pointer saved in step S28-1 (the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) is returned.

Next, the base ratio calculation process in step S28-4 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the base ratio calculation process.
The base ratio calculation process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the base ratio calculation process is based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The base ratio calculation process is called during execution of the performance display device control process.
When the base ratio calculation process is called in step S28-4, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG. 49.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-ball counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the out-ball counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38 When the process proceeds to -2 and it is determined that the value of the out-ball number counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In this embodiment, the reference value = 60,000 × n (n = integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as an initial value.
In step S38-2, the base ratio preservation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-3. In the base ratio saving process, the base ratio calculated in the previous base ratio calculation process (step S38-4) is saved (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 as the final base ratio of the previous section. In addition, the value of the payout counter is reset (“0” is set as the payout counter value).
In step S38-3, the reference value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4. In the reference value update process, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. As a result, the reference value is updated.
In step S38-4, the base ratio calculation process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-5). In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the out ball number counter and the value of the payout number counter.

(Various effects performed on pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) stored in the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area and special figure 2 start information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The hold effect is that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol based on the start information (hereinafter referred to as "hold effect target start information") that is the target of the hold effect is suspended, or the hold effect It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display of the special symbol based on the target start information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 1 start information storage area are set as display positions (display units) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position corresponding to each of) is specified.
Further, in the reserved symbol display area b3, as display positions (display units) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed, each of the four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 2 start information storage area. The display position corresponding to is specified.
Then, in the hold effect in which the special figure 1 start information is the target hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.
That is, during the period in which the hold effect target start information is stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) (after the hold effect target start information is acquired, the hold effect target start information becomes the hold effect target start information. During the period before the execution of the start determination based on the above), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b2.
At this time, at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed.
On the other hand, during the period in which the start information for the hold effect target is stored in the start information storage area during change (after the start determination based on the start information for the hold effect target is executed, the notification display of the special symbol based on the start information for the hold effect target ends. During the period up to), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target start information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect in which the special figure 2 start information is the hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the hold effect target start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after the hold effect target start information is acquired, the hold effect target start information is used as the hold effect target start information. During the period before the execution of the start determination based on the above), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target start information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3.
At this time, at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed.
On the other hand, during the period in which the start information for the hold effect target is stored in the start information storage area during change (after the execution of the start determination based on the start information for the hold effect target, the notification display of the special symbol based on the start information for the hold effect target ends. During the period up to), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target start information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

For example, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 start information in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area, and a hold effect targeting the special figure 1 start information is generated. When executed, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit of the reserved symbol display area b2 according to the start of the reserved effect.
After that, the storage area for storing the hold effect target start information is changed (shifted) from the third storage unit to the second storage unit, and the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed. Is changed (shifted) from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the display position corresponding to the second storage unit.
Further, the display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target start information is changed (shifted) from the second storage unit to the first storage unit in the storage area for storing the reserved effect target start information. Is changed (shifted) from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the display position corresponding to the first storage unit.
Further, in response to the change (shift) from the special figure 1 start information storage area (first storage unit) to the changing start information storage area, the storage area for storing the start information for the hold effect target is the hold effect target. The display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information is changed (shifted) from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the first storage unit) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target start information, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in the hold symbol display area b1 is ended, thereby ending the hold effect. To do.

In the present embodiment, as the types of the hold effect, a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect are defined.
The “normal hold effect” is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the start information of the hold effect target.
In the present embodiment, "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" are defined as the color (type) of the reserved symbol h.
In the normal hold effect, the "white" hold symbol h is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information. Then, in the normal hold effect, the color of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information remains "white" and does not change.
In the normal hold effect, the start information subject to the hold effect (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) is stored in the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area). It is started according to the above, and is ended according to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target start information.

The "hold notice production" is a kind of pre-reading notice production described later. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the hold effect target start information (start information corresponding to the look-ahead target hold information).
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of the advance special figure stop symbol determination based on the hold effect target start information (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be configured to suggest the result of the advance special figure change pattern determination (specifically, the possibility of "super reach change") based on the hold effect target start information.
In the following description, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information that is the target of the hold notice effect is referred to as “notice target hold symbol hy”.
In the hold notice effect, the color of the hold symbol hy to be noticed changes. That is, in the hold notice effect, the color of the hold symbol hy to be noticed changes to any one of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold". Then, in the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy that finally changes suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit game state will occur based on the hold effect target start information.
Here, the expectation of each color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary reserved symbol hy) is "gold", "red", "green", "blue", "white" (expected degree) in order from the one with the highest expectation. High → low expectations).
That is, each color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary reserved symbol hy) is graded (ranked) in advance based on the degree of expectation. At this time, the stages (ranks) of each color of the reserved symbol h are "gold" (fifth stage), "red" (fourth stage), and "green" (third stage) in order from the highest stage (rank). ), "Blue" (second stage), "white" (first stage) (stage high → stage low).
The “expectation degree” refers to the possibility (degree) that a big hit game state occurs when the color is selected as the final color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary reserved symbol hy).

Further, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers and the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. Then, in the hold notice effect, the color of the hold symbol hy to be noticed changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger each time.
The “holding change trigger” is a trigger for changing the color of the reserved symbol hy to be notified. Further, the "pending change content" is a content in which the color of the reserved symbol hy subject to advance notice changes.
In the present embodiment, as a hold change trigger, when the look-ahead target hold information (hold effect target start information) is acquired (at the time of storage), when the change effect related to the advance hold information described later is started, and the look-ahead target hold information (hold effect target) At the start of the variation effect related to (start information), at the start of each pseudo-variation effect included in the variation effect related to the look-ahead target hold information (especially at the start of the first pseudo-variation effect), the change related to the look-ahead target hold information At the end of each pseudo-variation effect included in the effect (particularly at the end of the second pseudo-variation effect) and the like are specified. Then, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
Specifically, when the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the look-ahead target hold information (hold effect target start information) belongs to "pseudo-reamless fluctuation", the time when the look-ahead target hold information is acquired (at the time of storage) and , At the start of the variation effect related to the advance hold information (when a plurality of advance hold information is stored, at the start of the variation effect related to each advance hold information) and the start of the variation effect related to the look-ahead target hold information. From time to time, one or more pending change triggers are set.
On the other hand, when the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the look-ahead target hold information (hold effect target start information) is "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation", or "pseudo-ream 4 fluctuation", the pre-reading target hold information At the time of acquisition (at the time of storage), at the start of the variation effect related to the advance hold information (when a plurality of advance hold information is stored, at the start of the variation effect related to each advance hold information), and the look-ahead target At the start of the variation effect related to the hold information, at the start of each pseudo-variation effect included in the change effect related to the look-ahead target hold information, and at the end of each pseudo-variation effect included in the change effect related to the look-ahead target hold information. From time to time, one or more pending change triggers are set.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 start information among the special figure 1 start information and the special figure 2 start information.
Then, the hold notice effect is started before the variable effect related to the look-ahead target hold information (starting information corresponding to the look-ahead target hold information) is started. Specifically, the hold notice effect is started in response to the start of the display of the hold symbol hy to be notified (memory of the start information to be held), and the variable effect based on the start information corresponding to the hold symbol hy to be notified is produced. It will be terminated according to the termination.

Next, the variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the first variation effect and the second variation effect are continuously executed as the variation effect during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the first variation effect mode (variation effect number), the mode corresponding to each type of variation mode (each variation mode number) is defined. Further, as a mode of the second variation effect (variation effect number), an aspect corresponding to each type of variation pattern (each variation pattern number) is defined.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is referred to as a “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is referred to as a “middle symbol”. , The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.

First, a mode of the first variation effect corresponding to each type of variation mode will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when "pseudo-ream fluctuation"("pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation", "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation" or "pseudo-ream 4 fluctuation") is selected (designated) as the type of fluctuation mode, the first fluctuation "Pseudo continuous fluctuation effect" is selected as the effect.
In the present embodiment, as the mode (variation effect number) of the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 2 variation" and the "pseudo-ream 3 variation" corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 3 variation""Direction" and "pseudo-ream 4-variation production" corresponding to "pseudo-ream 4-variation" are defined.
The "pseudo continuous variation effect" is an effect in which the variation display of the first effect symbol z1 is pseudo-executed a plurality of times during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous variation effect is configured to include a plurality of pseudo-variation effects.
In the present embodiment, the "pseudo-continuous two-variation effect" is configured to include two pseudo-variation effects. On the other hand, the "pseudo-ream three-variation effect" is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects. On the other hand, the "pseudo-ream 4-variation effect" is configured to include four pseudo-variation effects.
In the following description, among the pseudo-variation effects included in the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the final pseudo-variation effect is referred to as the "final-time pseudo-variation effect". Further, among the pseudo-variation effects included in the pseudo-continuous variation effects, each time of the pseudo-variation effects excluding the final inning pseudo-variation effect is referred to as an "intermediate inning pseudo-variation effect".

Each of the pseudo-variation effects (intermediate-time pseudo-variation effect and final-time pseudo-variation effect) is composed of a normal variation effect, a normal reach variation effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect.
The "normal variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally variablely displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner.
The "normal variation display" refers to a display in which the types of the first effect symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced.
The "lottery result display position" means a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect described later.
In the "normal reach variation effect", the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas. This refers to a display effect in which the combination of the first effect symbol z1 is a combination included in the "big hit symbol".
In the following description, in the normal reach variation effect (or the reduced reach variation effect described later), the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination included in the "big hit symbol" is referred to as "the first effect forming the reach state". It is called "directed design z1".
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and the left symbol and the right symbol that are temporarily stopped are of the same type. In the normal reach variation effect, the middle symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner.
The "temporary stop display" is a state in which one type of first effect symbol z1 is moved (swinged, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined mode in the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. , A display that stays continuously for a predetermined time.

The "pseudo-continuous production" is a production that encourages whether or not the next pseudo-variation production is executed.
The "pseudo-continuous effect" is a type of pseudo-continuous effect that incites (suggests) whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The "pseudo-ream continuation symbol" is configured to include information (in the present embodiment, the characters "NEXT") that encourages the execution of the next pseudo-variation effect.
In the present embodiment, "pseudo-ream continuous production" and "pseudo-ream end production" are defined as "pseudo-ream production".
The "pseudo-continuous continuous effect" is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed after inciting whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-ream continuation effect", a pseudo-ream continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo-ream continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous continuous symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "pseudo-ream continuation effect", the pseudo-ream continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
The "pseudo-continuous end effect" is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will not be executed after inciting whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-ream end effect", a pseudo-ream continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo-ream continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. To move. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous continuous symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "pseudo-ream end effect", the pseudo-ream continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being temporarily stopped. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will not be executed.

Specifically, in the midway pseudo-variation effect of each time, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed according to the start of the pseudo-variation effect. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, while the reach variation effect is being executed (during the formation of the reach state), the pseudo-continuous continuous effect is executed.
The pseudo-variable effect in the middle of each time is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-continuous continuous effect. Then, the next pseudo-variation effect is started according to the end of the halfway pseudo-variation effect.
In the final pseudo-variation effect of each time, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed according to the start of the pseudo variation effect. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, while the reach variation effect is being executed (during the formation of the reach state), the pseudo continuous end effect is executed.
The final inning pseudo-variation effect of each inning is ended according to the end of the pseudo-continuous end effect. Then, the second variation effect (normal reach variation effect or super reach variation effect) is started according to the end of the final pseudo variation effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when "pseudo-reamless variation" is selected (designated) as the type of the variation mode, "pseudo-reamless variation effect" is selected as the variation effect.
In the present embodiment, as the mode (variation effect number) of the "pseudo-reamless variation effect", the mode corresponding to each type of "pseudo-reamless variation" (each variation pattern number) is defined.
The "pseudo-continuous variable effect" is usually configured to include a variable effect.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", the "normal variation effect" is started according to the start of the "pseudo-reamless variation effect". That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
Then, in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", the normal variation display ("normal variation effect") of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the "pseudo-reamless variation effect".
In the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the pseudo-variation effect (normal pseudo-variation effect or special pseudo-variation effect) is not executed.

Next, a mode of the second variation effect corresponding to each type of variation pattern will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when "super reach variation" is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, "super reach variation effect" is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, as an aspect (variation effect number) of the "super reach variation effect", an aspect corresponding to each type of "super reach variation" (each variation pattern number) is defined.
Specifically, as a mode of "super reach fluctuation production", "super reach fluctuation production 1" corresponding to "super reach fluctuation 1" and "super reach fluctuation production 2" corresponding to "super reach fluctuation 2" , "Super Reach Fluctuation 3" corresponding to "Super Reach Fluctuation 3", "Super Reach Fluctuation 4" corresponding to "Super Reach Fluctuation 4", and "Super Reach Fluctuation 5" corresponding to "Super Reach Fluctuation 5""Direction5" is stipulated.
As a result, the expectations of each aspect of the "super reach variation effect" are, in descending order of expectation, "super reach variation effect 5", "super reach variation effect 4", "super reach variation effect 3", and "super reach variation effect 3". "Super reach fluctuation production 2" and "Super reach fluctuation production 1" (high expectation → low expectation).

The "super reach variation effect"("super reach variation effect 1" to "super reach variation effect 5") is composed of a reach variation effect, a reduced reach variation effect, and a development reach effect.
The “reduced reach variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 forming the reach state is reduced and displayed (temporarily stopped display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation effect, only the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect symbol z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right symbol and the left symbol forming the reach state are temporarily stopped and displayed in the reduced state, and the middle symbol is not displayed.

The "development reach effect" is an effect that encourages the "big hit symbol" to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach effect is performed during the reach variation effect.
In the present embodiment, "development reach production 1" to "development reach production 5" having different contents are defined as the types of development reach production.
Then, in the "super reach variation production 1", the "development reach production 1" is executed as the development reach production. The "development reach effect 1" is configured to include the display of the "development reach effect image 1" on the display screen 31a. The "development reach production image 1" is a production image by "character A".
On the other hand, in the "super reach variation production 2", the "development reach production 2" is executed as the development reach production. The "development reach effect 2" is configured to include the display of the "development reach effect image 2" on the display screen 31a. The "development reach production image 2" is a production image by "character B".
On the other hand, in the "super reach variation production 3", the "development reach production 3" is executed as the development reach production. The "development reach effect 3" is configured to include the display of the "development reach effect image 3" on the display screen 31a. The "development reach production image 3" is a production image by "character C".
On the other hand, in the "super reach variation production 4", the "development reach production 4" is executed as the development reach production. The "development reach effect 4" is configured to include the display of the "development reach effect image 4" on the display screen 31a. The "development reach production image 4" is a production image by "character D".
On the other hand, in the "super reach variation production 5", the "development reach production 5" is executed as the development reach production. The “development reach effect 5” includes the display of the “development reach effect image 5” on the display screen 31a. The "development reach production image 5" is a production image by "character E".

Specifically, in the "super reach variation effect 1" to "super reach variation effect 5", the reduced reach variation effect is executed after the normal reach variation effect is executed according to the start thereof.
That is, from the state in which the left and right symbols form the reach state, the left and right symbols forming the reach state are reduced, and the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left end of the display screen 31a and reduced. The right symbol is moved to the upper right end of the display screen 31a, and the display of the middle symbol disappears. At this time, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol that are stopped and displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
Then, in "Super Reach Fluctuation Production 1" to "Super Reach Fluctuation Production 5", "Development Reach Production"("Development Reach Production 1" to "Development Reach Production 5" during the period when the reduced reach fluctuation production is being executed. ") Is executed.
That is, the "development reach effect" is started according to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach variation effect. The "development reach production" ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start.
"Super Reach Fluctuation Production 1" to "Super Reach Fluctuation Production 5" are terminated in accordance with the end of "Development Reach Production". Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "super reach variation effect 1" to the "super reach variation effect 5".

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when "normal reach variation" is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, "normal reach variation effect" is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, as an aspect (variation effect number) of the "normal reach variation effect", an aspect corresponding to each type of "normal reach variation" (each variation pattern number) is defined.
The "normal reach variation effect" is configured to include a normal reach variation effect.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation effect", the normal reach variation effect is executed according to the start of the "normal reach variation effect". That is, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach state. Normally, the reach variation effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start.
The "normal reach variation effect" ends in response to the end of the normal reach variation effect. Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "normal reach variation effect".
In the normal reach variation effect, the development reach effect is not executed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when "variation without reach" is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, "variation without reach" is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, as the mode (variation effect number) of the “variation without reach”, the mode corresponding to each type (each variation pattern number) of the “variation without reach” is defined.
The "variable effect without reach" is usually configured to include a variable effect.
Specifically, in the "variable effect without reach", the "normal variable effect" is executed according to the start thereof. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
Then, in the "variable effect without reach", the normal variation display ("normal variation effect") of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the "variable effect without reach". Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "variable effect without reach".
In the non-reach variable effect, the reach variable effect and the advanced reach effect are not executed.

Next, the main notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the main notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect.
The "main notice effect" is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of the start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variation effect. It is a production to do.
In the present embodiment, the main advance notice effect is executed during the first variable effect. Then, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (specifically, the type of fluctuation pattern may be "super reach fluctuation").
In this embodiment, "Tsujigiri notice" is defined as the type of main notice effect.

The "Tsujigiri notice" may be the mode of the second variable effect (specifically, the mode of the second variable effect is the "super reach variable effect"" depending on the effect mode (contents of the Tsujigiri notice image described later). Expectation) is suggested.
The Tsujigiri notice is configured to include the display of the Tsujigiri notice image on the display screen 31a. The Tsujigiri notice image is a production image in which the screen is torn and predetermined characters appear.
In the present embodiment, "Tsujigiri notice 1" to "Tsujigiri notice 5" are defined as the type (mode) of the Tsujigiri notice.
In "Tsujigiri notice 1", "Tsujigiri notice image 1" is displayed as the Tsujigiri notice image. In the Tsujigiri notice image 1, the screen is torn and the characters "Chance !?" are displayed.
In the "Tsujigiri notice 2", the "Tsujigiri notice image 2" is displayed as the Tsujigiri notice image. In the Tsujigiri notice image 2, the screen is torn and the characters "Great chance !?" are displayed.
In the "Tsujigiri notice 3", the "Tsujigiri notice image 3" is displayed as the Tsujigiri notice image. In the Tsujigiri notice image 3, the screen is torn and the characters "super heat !?" are displayed.
In the "Tsujigiri notice 4", the "Tsujigiri notice image 4" is displayed as the Tsujigiri notice image. In the Tsujigiri notice image 4, the screen is torn and the characters "super heat !?" are displayed.
In the "Tsujigiri notice 5", the "Tsujigiri notice image 5" is displayed as the Tsujigiri notice image. In the Tsujigiri notice image 5, the screen is torn and the characters "Ranbu !!" are displayed.
The expectations of each type of Tsujigiri notice are, in descending order of expectation, "Tsujigiri notice 5", "Tsujigiri notice 4", "Tsujigiri notice 3", "Tsujigiri notice 2", "Tsujigiri notice 1" (expectation level). High → low expectations).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value is suggested by the main notice effect.
That is, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the higher the set value, the higher the probability that "Tsujigiri notice strength 1" to "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" will be selected as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice. Is high. As a result, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the Tsujigiri notice will be executed.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the set value is suggested according to the frequency with which the Tsujigiri notice is executed.

Next, the sub-notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the sub-notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect.
The "sub-notice effect" is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of the start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variation effect. It is a production to do.
In the present embodiment, the sub-notice effect suggests the result of the special figure winning determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit").
In this embodiment, "character notice" is defined as a type of sub notice effect.

The "character notice" suggests the result (expectation degree) of the special figure winning determination depending on the production mode (contents of the character notice image described later).
The character notice is configured to include the display of the character notice image on the display screen 31a.
In this embodiment, "character notice 1" to "character notice 5" are defined as the type (mode) of the character notice.
In the "character notice 1", the "character notice image 1" is displayed as the character notice image. In the character preview image 1, "character A" is displayed.
In the "character notice 2", the "character notice image 2" is displayed as the character notice image. In the character preview image 2, "character B" is displayed.
In the "character notice 3", the "character notice image 3" is displayed as the character notice image. In the character preview image 3, "character C" is displayed.
In the "character notice 4", the "character notice image 4" is displayed as the character notice image. In the character preview image 4, "character D" is displayed.
In the "character notice 5", the "character notice image 5" is displayed as the character notice image. In the character preview image 5, "character E" is displayed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value is suggested by the sub-notice effect.
That is, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that "character notice strength 1" to "character notice strength 5" will be selected as the effect strength of the character notice. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the character notice will be executed.
Therefore, the set value is suggested according to the frequency with which the character notice is executed.
Further, the "character notice 5" is selected only when the set value = "5" or "6".
This suggests that the set value = "5" or "6" when the "character notice 5" is executed as the sub notice effect.

(Processing executed by the effect control circuit 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided in the effect control circuit 300. The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock pulse oscillator, various RAM, and the like are initialized. Next, the effect random number update process for updating various effect random numbers is executed. After that, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control circuit 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control circuit 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the subtimer interrupt processing.
The effect control circuit 300 is configured to include a clock pulse generation circuit. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 at predetermined cycles based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock pulse generation circuit. When the subtimer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the RAM save area.
In step S31-2, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers included in the effect control circuit 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, the command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the receive buffer of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, the time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each effect is managed.
Here, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 corresponds to each effect (each aspect of the variable effect, each aspect of the stop effect, each aspect of the advance notice effect, each aspect of the look-ahead advance notice effect, each aspect of the hold effect, etc.). The effect control table is stored.
The "effect control table" is information that defines the progress of the effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, movable body effect, etc.).
A plurality of process data are registered in each effect control table in chronological order. Each process data contains one or more command information. Each command information is a process for designating the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). In particular, each command information includes information for designating the content of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number).

In the time schedule management process, the effect control table corresponding to each effect set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the effect management timer corresponding to the effect (the effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect). ) And the progress of the effect are managed.
Specifically, for each effect, among the process data registered in the effect control table, the process based on the process data corresponding to the value of the current effect management timer is executed. As a result, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S31-5, the register reset processing is executed and the subtimer interrupt processing is terminated. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG. 38.
In step S32-1, the set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand that specifies a set value has been received. Then, when it is determined that the subcommand for specifying the set value has been received, the set value specified by the subcommand is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S32-2, the game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not the game state specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, the hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, the look-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The look-ahead command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, the variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, the stop command reception process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). The stop command reception process will be described later.

Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG. 39.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the hold count designation command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"), and the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the command for specifying the number of holds does not specify an increase in the number of holds (specifies that the number of holds has decreased by "1"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the pending number addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-4.
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the hold number.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 start information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read out, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b2, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 1 start information is stored. The display position corresponding to (4th storage unit) is set. Here, the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 start information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number of special figure 2, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 start information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read out, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b3, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 2 start information is stored. The display position corresponding to (4th storage unit) is set. Here, the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 start information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter.

In step S36-4, the hold number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies the subtraction of the hold number in Special Figure 1.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the finished hold effect is finished.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position) is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit. 1 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the finished hold effect is finished.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b3 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position) is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit. 1 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

Next, the look-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead command reception process.
When the look-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG. 40.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead designation command (first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, and third look-ahead designation command) has been received, and it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has been received (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, the look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as hold information.
In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set. Further, as the reserved information storage area, the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 start information storage area of RAM 230) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 start information storage area of RAM 230) ) Corresponds to the second reserved information storage area, and is set.
The first reserved information storage area is configured to include the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit as storage units capable of storing the reserved information. Then, in the first reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area is configured to include the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit as storage units capable of storing the reserved information. Then, in the second reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stopped symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode (“variation mode number” or “indefinite value”), and content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern number” or “variation pattern number”). It includes a second variation information indicating "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol” or “big hit p symbol”). ”), The content of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead designation command (“variation mode m” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “variation pattern n” or “. "Indefinite value"), the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second variation corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Generates variable information and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("missing symbol" or "big hit p symbol"). ”), The content of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead designation command (“variation mode m” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “variation pattern n” or “. "Indefinite value"), the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second variation corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Generates variable information and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “look-ahead target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which the notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the look-ahead target hold information is referred to as "advance hold information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the look-ahead notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 during execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. ..
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5 and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the pre-reading target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information, and (2) the advance hold information of a predetermined number (“2” in this embodiment) or more is stored. (3) There is no advance hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as the type of fluctuation pattern, and (4) the time saving control is stopped. When all the conditions of (5) that the big hit game state is not occurring are satisfied, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
The content of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, as a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or a plurality of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied instead of all the conditions (1) to (5). It doesn't matter. Further, the pre-reading notice effect execution condition may include other conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions (1) to (5).

In step S33-5, the look-ahead notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, a look-ahead notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect is executed.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is registered is stored.
In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, first, a look-ahead notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired look-ahead notice effect lottery random number and the look-ahead notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), step S33-7 is performed. If it is determined that the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect has been lost (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, the pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the content of the look-ahead notice effect (hold notice effect) is set.
Specifically, in the look-ahead notice effect setting process, first, the hold notice effect intensity setting process is executed. In the hold notice effect strength setting process, the effect strength of the hold notice effect is set.
In the present embodiment, "hold notice strength 1", "hold notice strength 2", "hold notice strength 3", and "hold notice strength 4" are defined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect. ..
Then, the expected degree of each production strength is "holding notice strength 4", "holding notice strength 3", "holding notice strength 2", "holding notice strength 1" (high expectation degree →) in order from the one with the highest expectation. Expectations are low).
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, the effect strength lottery table in which the correspondence between the effect intensity lottery random number and the effect intensity of the hold notice effect (“hold notice strength 4” to “hold notice strength 1”) is registered. Is stored.
Further, as the hold notice effect strength lottery table, the hold notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to each combination of the variable mode type, the variable pattern type, and the stop symbol type is stored.
In the hold notice effect strength setting process, first, the effect strength lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the look-ahead target hold information, the type of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead target hold information, and the type of the stop symbol indicated by the look-ahead target hold information are confirmed, and the hold corresponding to this confirmation result is confirmed. Notice effect Read the strength lottery table. Then, the effect strength of the hold notice effect is determined (determined) based on the acquired effect intensity lottery random number and the read hold notice effect intensity lottery table.
In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, when the effect intensity of the hold notice effect is determined, the process proceeds to the final color setting process.

In the final color setting process, the final color is set.
In the following description, the hold symbol h corresponding to the look-ahead target hold information is referred to as a "look-ahead target hold symbol".
The “final color” refers to the color of the reserved symbol to be read ahead that finally changes in the hold notice effect.
In the present embodiment, when "hold notice strength 4" is determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect, "gold" is determined (determined) as the final color.
On the other hand, when "hold notice strength 3" is determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect, "red" is determined (determined) as the final color.
On the other hand, when "hold notice strength 2" is determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect, "green" is determined (determined) as the final color.
On the other hand, when "hold notice strength 1" is determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect, "blue" is determined (determined) as the final color.
In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, when the final color is determined, the process shifts to the hold change trigger setting process.
Here, a configuration that suggests a set value may be used depending on the mode of the hold notice effect.
Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a color corresponding to the set value may be selected as the final color.
That is, as the color (type) of the reserved symbol h, a special color (for example, "rainbow color") is specified in addition to "white", "blue", "green", "red" and "gold". Then, the final color is determined in consideration of the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
For example, when "hold notice strength 4" is determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect and the set value = "6" or "5" stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is set. As the final color, one of "gold" and "rainbow" is determined. At this time, one of "gold" and "rainbow" is determined by lottery.
When "hold notice strength 3" to "hold notice strength 1" are determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect, "rainbow color" is not determined as the final color. Further, when the set value = "4" to "1" stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, "rainbow color" is not determined as the final color.
This makes it possible to suggest the set value depending on the mode of the hold notice effect (color of the hold symbol h).

In the hold change trigger setting process, the hold change trigger is set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a hold change trigger lottery table in which correspondence between the hold change trigger lottery random number and the combination of the hold change trigger is registered.
Further, as the hold change trigger lottery table, the hold change trigger lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 1 hold number (“3” or “4”), the type of the variable mode, and the final color is stored. ing.
In the hold change trigger lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the look-ahead target hold information is "pseudo-reamless fluctuation", as a combination of hold change triggers, when the look-ahead target hold information is acquired (when stored), A combination including at least one hold change trigger is registered at the start of the variation effect related to the advance hold information of each time and at the start of the change effect related to the look-ahead target hold information.
On the other hand, in the hold change trigger lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the look-ahead target hold information is "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation" to "pseudo-ream 4 fluctuation", the look-ahead target hold is set as a combination of hold change triggers. At the time of information acquisition (at the time of storage), at the start of the variation effect related to the advance hold information of each time, at the start of the variation effect related to the look-ahead target hold information, and at the start of the change effect related to the look-ahead target hold information, each pseudo change effect included in the change effect related to the look-ahead target hold information At the start of, and at the end of each pseudo-variation effect included in the variation effect related to the look-ahead target hold information, a combination including at least one hold change trigger is registered.
In the hold change trigger setting process, first, the hold change trigger lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number, the type of the variable mode indicated by the look-ahead target hold information, and the final color determined by the final color setting process are confirmed, and the hold change trigger lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is displayed. read out. Then, the combination of the hold change trigger is determined (determined) based on the acquired hold change trigger lottery random number and the read hold change trigger lottery table. Then, according to the combination of the determined hold change triggers, one or a plurality of hold change triggers related to the hold notice effect are set.
In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, when the hold change trigger is set, the process shifts to the hold change content setting process.

In the hold change content setting process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is set.
Specifically, in the hold change content setting process, the color of the look-ahead target hold before the change and the color of the look-ahead target hold symbol after the change are set as the hold change contents.
In the present embodiment, among the one-time or a plurality of hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger setting process, the hold change triggers that arrive later (later hold change triggers) are set to each hold change trigger in order. The corresponding pending change is determined.
For example, when three hold change triggers are set in the hold change trigger setting process, each time in the order of the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger. The content of the pending change corresponding to the pending change trigger of is determined.
In addition, when determining the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change trigger, first, the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol after the change is determined, and then the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol before the change is determined. To. At this time, as the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol before the change, a color having a lower expectation is determined as compared with the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol after the change. As a result, the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol changes (promotes) to a color with a high degree of expectation in response to the arrival of each pending change trigger.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a hold change content lottery table in which correspondence between the hold change content lottery random number and the color of the look-ahead target hold symbol before the change is registered.
Further, as the hold change content lottery table, the hold change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the hold symbol h (the color of the hold symbol to be read ahead after the change) is stored.
Then, in the hold change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the hold symbol h (the color of the hold symbol to be read ahead after the change), the color of the hold symbol to be read ahead before the change is compared with the color of the hold symbol to be read ahead after the change. Therefore, only the colors with low expectations are registered.
In the hold change content setting process, first, among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger setting process, the hold change content is determined for the final hold change trigger. To do this, first, the color of the reserved symbol to be read ahead after the change related to the last inning change trigger is determined. At this time, the final color determined in the final color setting process is determined as the color of the reserved symbol to be read ahead after the change related to the last inning change trigger. Next, the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol before the change related to the final pending change trigger is determined. To do this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the lottery table for the contents of the pending change corresponding to the color of the reserved symbol to be read ahead after the change determined for the last inning change trigger is read. Then, based on the acquired pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol before the change related to the final pending change trigger is determined.
Next, in the hold change content setting process, among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger setting process, the hold change contents are determined for each hold change trigger excluding the last hold change trigger. At this time, the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change trigger is determined in order from the pending change trigger that arrives later.
In order to determine the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change trigger, first, the color of the reserved symbol to be read ahead after the change related to the pending change trigger is determined. At this time, as the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol after the change related to the current pending change trigger, the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol before the change determined for the next pending change trigger is determined. Next, the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol before the change related to the current pending change trigger is determined. To do this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the hold change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the hold symbol to be read ahead after the change determined for the current hold change trigger is read. Then, based on the acquired pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol before the change related to the current pending change trigger is determined.
Next, in the hold change content setting process, the hold change content determined for each hold change trigger is set in association with the hold change trigger. As a result, the color of the hold symbol to be read ahead is changed (promoted) according to the hold change content set for the hold change trigger each time.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, next, "1" is set in the look-ahead notice effect during flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
As described above, the hold notice production is started in response to the arrival of the first hold change opportunity.
By a process (not shown), "0" is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 according to the end of the hold advance notice effect.

Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG. 41.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received, and if it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2 and the predetermined control command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, and a variation pattern specification command.
In step S34-2, the stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is determined based on the type of the stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Here, a configuration that suggests a set value may be used depending on the mode of the stop effect.
Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a mode corresponding to the set value may be selected as the mode of the stop effect.
That is, as an aspect (type) of the first effect symbol z1, a normal effect symbol and a special effect symbol are defined. Then, in consideration of the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the mode of the first effect symbol z1 to be stopped and displayed in the stop effect is determined.
For example, when the set value = "6" or "5" stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, as the mode of the effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the stop effect, the normal effect symbol and the special effect symbol are used. One of the production symbols is determined. At this time, one of the normal effect symbol and the special effect symbol is determined by lottery.
When the set value = "4" to "1" stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the special effect symbol is an aspect of the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the stop effect. Is never determined.
As a result, it is possible to suggest the set value by the mode of the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the stop effect.

In step S34-3, the variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, the mode of the variation effect (variation effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, the first variation effect determination process for determining the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first variable effect lottery table in which correspondence between the type of variable mode (variable mode number) and the mode of the first variable effect (variable effect number) is registered. ..
In the first variation effect determination process, first, the first variation effect lottery table is read out. Then, among the modes of the first variation effect (variation effect number) registered in the first variation effect lottery table, the first variation effect corresponding to the type of variation mode (variation mode number) designated by the variation mode designation command. (Selection).

In the variation effect determination process, next, the second variation effect determination process for determining the mode (variation effect number) of the second variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second variation effect lottery table in which correspondence between the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) and the mode of the second variation effect (variation effect number) is registered. ..
In the second variation effect determination process, first, the second variation effect lottery table is read out. Then, among the modes of the second variation effect (variation effect number) registered in the second variation effect lottery table, the second variation effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) designated by the variation pattern designation command. (Selection).

In the variation effect determination process, next, as the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect, "pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect", "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" or "pseudo-ream 4 variation effect"") Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the "pseudo-continuous variation effect" is determined as the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect, the aspect of each "pseudo-continuous variation effect" included in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect". And, the mode of the "pseudo-continuous end effect" included in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect" is determined.
Here, a configuration that suggests a set value may be used depending on the mode of "pseudo-continuous effect"("pseudo-continuouseffect" or "pseudo-continuous end effect").
Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a mode corresponding to the set value may be selected as the mode of the "pseudo-continuous production".
That is, as the mode of the "pseudo-continuous production", a normal mode and a special mode are defined. In the "pseudo-ream effect" according to the normal mode, the normal pseudo-ream continuation symbol is displayed as the "pseudo-ream continuation symbol". On the other hand, in the "pseudo-ream effect" related to the special aspect, the special pseudo-ream continuation symbol is displayed as the "pseudo-ream continuation symbol". Then, the mode of the "pseudo-continuous effect" is determined in consideration of the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
For example, "pseudo-ream 4 variation" is determined as the type of variation mode ("pseudo-ream 4-variation effect" is determined as the mode of the first variation effect), and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. When the set value = "6" or "5", one of the normal mode and the special mode is determined as the mode of the "pseudo-continuous effect". At this time, one of the normal mode and the special mode is determined by lottery.
When "pseudo-ream 2 variation" or "pseudo-ream 3 variation" is determined as the type of the variation mode ("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" or "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" is selected as the mode of the first variation effect. If it is determined), a special aspect is not determined as the aspect of the "pseudo-continuous production". Further, when the set value = "4" to "1" stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a special mode is not determined as the mode of the "pseudo-continuous effect". ..
Thereby, it is possible to suggest the set value by the mode of the "pseudo-ream effect" (the mode of the pseudo-ream continuous symbol).

In step S34-4, the advance notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the advance notice effect determination process, the modes of the main advance notice effect and the sub advance notice effect are determined.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the Tsujigiri notice is executed as the main notice effect, and the character notice is executed as the sub notice effect.
In the notice production determination process, first, the effect strength (whether or not to execute the Tsujigiri notice) of the Tsujigiri notice (main notice effect) is determined.
In the present embodiment, "Tsujigiri notice strength 0" to "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" are defined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice.
Then, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 0" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, the Tsujigiri notice is not executed. On the other hand, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 1" to "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" are determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, the Tsujigiri notice is executed.
The expectation of each production strength of Tsujigiri notice is "Tsujigiri notice strength 5", "Tsujigiri notice strength 4", "Tsujigiri notice strength 3", "Tsujigiri notice strength 2", "Tsujigiri notice strength 2" in order from the one with the highest expectation. It is stipulated that the strength is 1 ”(high expectation → low expectation).
In the ROM of the production control circuit 300, there is a Tsujigiri notice production strength lottery table in which correspondence between the production strength lottery random number and the production strength of the Tsujigiri notice (“Tsujigiri notice strength 0” to “Tsujigiri notice strength 5”) is registered. It is stored.
In addition, as a Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table, a high-probability Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the "special figure high probability state" and a high-probability Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the "special figure low probability state" And are stored.
Furthermore, as a high-accuracy Tsujigiri notice effect lottery table, the high-accuracy Tsujigiri advance notice effect intensity corresponding to the combination of the type of fluctuation pattern, the type of stop symbol, and the set value ("1" to "6"). The lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a low-probability Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table, the low-probability Tsujigiri notice effect strength corresponding to the combination of the type of fluctuation pattern, the type of stop symbol, and the set value ("1" to "6"). The lottery table is stored.
The higher the accuracy of the Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the higher setting value, the higher the probability that "Tsujigiri notice strength 1" to "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" will be selected as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice. .. In other words, the higher the probability of the Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the higher set value, the lower the probability that "Tsujigiri notice strength 0" will be selected as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the higher the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the higher the probability that the Tsujigiri notice will be executed. ..
To determine the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, first, the effect intensity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the current game state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”), the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) specified by the variation pattern specification command, and the stop symbol specification command specify. The type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) and the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 are confirmed, and the Tsujigiri notice effect intensity lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the production strength of the Tsujigiri notice is determined (determined) based on the acquired effect strength lottery random number and the read Tsujigiri notice effect strength lottery table.

When any one of "Tsujigiri notice strength 1" to "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, the type of Tsujigiri notice is determined.
In the present embodiment, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 1" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, "Tsujigiri notice 1" is determined as the type of Tsujigiri notice.
On the other hand, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 2" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, "Tsujigiri notice 2" is determined as the type of Tsujigiri notice.
On the other hand, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 3" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, "Tsujigiri notice 3" is determined as the type of Tsujigiri notice.
On the other hand, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 4" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, "Tsujigiri notice 4" is determined as the type of Tsujigiri notice.
On the other hand, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" is determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice, "Tsujigiri notice 5" is determined as the type of Tsujigiri notice.

In the advance notice effect determination process, next, the effect intensity (whether or not to execute the sub advance notice) of the character advance notice (sub advance notice effect) is determined.
In the present embodiment, "character notice strength 0" to "character notice strength 5" are defined as the effect strength of the character notice.
Then, when "character notice strength 0" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, the character notice is not executed. On the other hand, when "character notice strength 1" to "character notice strength 5" are determined as the effect strength of the character notice, the character notice is executed.
The expectation of each production strength of the character notice is "Character notice strength 5", "Character notice strength 4", "Character notice strength 3", "Character notice strength 2", "Character notice strength 2" in order from the one with the highest expectation. It is stipulated that the strength is 1 ”(high expectation → low expectation).
In the ROM of the production control circuit 300, there is a character notice production strength lottery table in which correspondence between the production strength lottery random number and the character notice production strength ("character notice strength 0" to "character notice strength 5") is registered. It is stored.
In addition, as the character notice effect strength lottery table, the character notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the combination of the type of the variable pattern, the type of the stop symbol, and the set value ("1" to "6") is stored. There is.
The lottery table for the character notice effect strength corresponding to the higher set value has a higher probability that "character notice strength 1" to "character notice strength 5" are selected as the character notice effect strength. In other words, the probability that "character notice strength 0" is selected as the character notice effect strength is lower in the character notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the higher set value.
As a result, the higher the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the higher the probability that the character advance notice will be executed.
Further, in the character notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the set value "6" or "5", "character notice strength 0" to "character notice strength 5" are registered as the character notice effect strength.
On the other hand, in the character notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the set values "1" to "4", "character notice strength 0" to "character notice strength 4" are registered as the character notice effect strength ("character"). Notice strength 5 "is not registered).
As a result, it is suggested that the set value = "6" or "5" when the character notice of the type corresponding to the "character notice strength 5"("character notice 5" described later) is executed. ..
In order to determine the effect strength of the character notice, first, the effect strength lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the variation pattern (variation pattern number) specified by the variation pattern specification command, the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the stop symbol specification command, and the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 are saved. Check the set value and read out the character notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result. Then, the effect intensity of the character advance notice is determined (determined) based on the acquired effect intensity lottery random number and the read character notice effect effect intensity lottery table.

When any of "character notice strength 1" to "character notice strength 5" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, the type of the character notice is determined.
In the present embodiment, when "character notice strength 1" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, "character notice 1" is determined as the type of character notice.
On the other hand, when "character notice strength 2" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, "character notice 2" is determined as the type of character notice.
On the other hand, when "character notice strength 3" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, "character notice 3" is determined as the type of character notice.
On the other hand, when "character notice strength 4" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, "character notice 4" is determined as the type of character notice.
On the other hand, when "character notice strength 5" is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, "character notice 5" is determined as the type of character notice.

In step S34-5, the variation effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable effect setting process, the effect control table for the variable effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the mode of the first variation effect (variation effect number) determined in step S34-3 and the mode of the second variation effect determined in step S34-3. Read out the effect control table corresponding to (variable effect number).
Next, the read effect control table is combined to generate an effect control table related to the variation effect. Then, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the variable effect is started.
In addition, when the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect is determined as "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect", "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" or "pseudo-ream 4 variation effect"). Set the type determined in step S34-3 as the type of each "pseudo-continuous variation effect" included in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", and is also included in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect". As the type of "pseudo-continuous end effect", the type determined in step S34-3 is set.
Further, in step S34-4, when "Tsujigiri notice strength 1" to "Tsujigiri notice strength 5" are determined as the effect strength of the Tsujigiri notice (when the Tsujigiri notice is executed), in step S34-4. Read the effect control table corresponding to the determined type of Tsujigiri notice. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the Tsujigiri notice is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variation effect.
Further, in step S34-4, when "character notice strength 1" to "character notice strength 5" are determined as the effect strength of the character notice (when the character notice is executed), in step S34-4. Read the effect control table corresponding to the determined character notice type. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the character notice is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variation effect.

Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG. 42.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, the stop effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, the effect control table of the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the stop effect number determined in step S34-2 is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the stop effect is started.
Here, in the stop effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, which were temporarily stopped and displayed at the end of the variable effect, are stopped and displayed.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio in each section is calculated by the base ratio calculation process (process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2) in step S28-4. Here, as each section, a section in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 [balls] in the present embodiment) is detected (discharged) is defined.
Further, by the performance display device display process (process based on the program stored in the unused area m2) in step S28-5, the performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio calculated in step S28-4 is generated. , Performance display device data Signal control Set in the data setting area.
Further, the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area by the performance display device output process (process based on the program stored in the unused area m2) in step S30-8. According to this, the value of each bit (bits corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") included in the port register of the output port 4 is set.
As a result, the output of each data signal (bits corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is controlled according to the value set for each bit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the display of the performance display device 61 is updated, the output port is subjected to the performance display device data signal clear processing (processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) in step S30-2. The values of all the bits (bits corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") included in the port register of 4 are cleared.
As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped for all the data signals for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the power is cut off, all the bits included in the port register of the output port 4 are subjected to the output port stop processing (processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) in step S3-4. The value of (bits corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") is cleared.
As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped for all the data signals for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is set by the processing based on the program stored in the non-used area m2, and the program stored in the used area m1. It is cleared (initialized) by the processing based on.
Here, the process of clearing the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is smaller than the process of setting the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61.
Therefore, by clearing the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 by the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1, the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 is being executed. In addition, the number of times the process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 is called can be reduced.
As a result, the number of times that save processing such as the processing for setting the interrupt disabled state and the processing for protecting (saving) the register used during the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 is required is reduced. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the program.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the ROM 220 including the used area m1 and the non-used area m2, and the CPU 210 for setting data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. Be equipped with.
Then, the CPU 210 initializes the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) set by the program stored in the unused area m2 by the program stored in the used area m1.
Here, in general, the processing for setting the data signal has a larger processing amount than the processing for initializing the data signal.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which a data signal for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 is set by a program stored in the non-use area m2.
This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the program stored in the used area m2.
On the other hand, when the program stored in the unused area m2 is called during the execution of the program stored in the used area m1, the process of setting the interrupt disabled state and the program stored in the used area m1 It is necessary to perform save processing such as processing to protect (save) the register used by. Therefore, as the number of times the program stored in the unused area m2 is called increases, the number of times of the required save processing increases, and as a result, the capacity of the program increases.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the data signal for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 is initialized by the program stored in the used area m1.
As a result, the number of times the program stored in the unused area m2 is called during execution of the program stored in the used area m1 can be reduced, and as a result, the increase in the number of times of saving processing is suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the program.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reduce the control load in controlling the display of the performance display device 61.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a power cutoff is detected (when a power cutoff warning signal is input), a data signal for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) However, it is initialized.
As a result, when the power cutoff is detected, the output of the data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") is stopped (low level), and the display of the base ratio by the performance display device 61 is stopped ( All segments turn off).
Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the display by the performance display device 61 from becoming inappropriate when a power cutoff is detected.
That is, when the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process.
In particular, since the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited during the execution of the save process when the power is cut off, various processes for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 (for example, the common signal update process in step S30-4, The performance display device data signal output process in step S37-4, the performance display device control process in step S4-9, etc.) are not executed.
As a result, during the execution of the evacuation process when the power is cut off, only one of the four display units included in the performance display device 61 may be lit, and the display by the performance display device 61 is not possible. May be appropriate.
Therefore, in the present invention, when a power cutoff is detected, the data signal for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 is initialized to prevent the display by the performance display device 61 from becoming inappropriate. are doing.

(Modification example 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made in the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, for all the lighting element groups (lighting element group A to lighting element group D) included in the performance display device 61, a plurality of lighting element groups (lighting element group a to lighting element group a) included in the main display 60. Of the lighting element group d), it is electrically connected to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 corresponding to any of the lighting element groups.
However, among the plurality of lighting element groups (lighting element group A to lighting element group D) included in the performance display device 61, some of the lighting element groups are a plurality of lighting element groups (lighting) included in the main display 60. Of the element group a to the lighting element group d), the configuration may be electrically connected to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 corresponding to any of the lighting element groups.
For example, the lighting element group A is connected to the common signal line CL1 corresponding to the lighting element group a, and the lighting element group B is connected to the common signal line CL2 corresponding to the lighting element group b, while the lighting element group C. Each of the lighting element group D and the lighting element group D may be provided with a dedicated common signal line (and a transistor for controlling the grounding of the common signal line).

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, the performance display device 61 includes a plurality of lighting element groups (lighting element group A to lighting element group D) that are electrically connected to different common signal lines.
However, the performance display device 61 may be configured to include only one lighting element group electrically connected to one common signal line.
That is, all the lighting elements included in the performance display device 61 correspond to any one of the plurality of lighting element groups (lighting element group a to lighting element group d) included in the main display 60. It may be configured to be electrically connected to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above embodiment, the set value display device 62 is configured to display the set value.
However, the performance display device 61 may be configured to display the set value. That is, the set value and the base ratio may be displayed on one display device.
At this time, the set value and the base ratio may be displayed on different display units in one display device. Specifically, one display device may be configured to include one or a plurality of display units for displaying a set value and one or a plurality of display units for displaying a base ratio. ..
Alternatively, the set value and the base ratio may be displayed on the same display unit in one display device. Specifically, one display device is configured to include one or a plurality of display units (hereinafter referred to as "specific display units"), and if the set values and base ratios of the specific display units are different at different times. It may be displayed as a set. That is, the target (information) displayed on the specific display unit may be switched from one of the set values and the base ratio to the other in response to the occurrence of a predetermined trigger.
For example, when displaying both the set value and the base ratio on the performance display device 61, the set value is displayed when the set value change permission state is in effect, and the base is displayed when the setting value change permission state is not in effect. It may be configured to display the ratio. With such a configuration, it is possible to switch between the display related to the set value and the display related to the base ratio depending on whether or not the set value is permitted.

In particular, in a configuration in which both the set value and the base ratio are displayed by one display device, the process for displaying the base ratio (specifically, the base ratio calculation process in step S28-4 and the performance in step S28-5). The display device display process, the performance display device output process in step S30-8, etc.) are executed by the program stored in the unused area m2, and the process for displaying the set value (specifically, step S4). The setting value management process of -3) may be executed by the program stored in the used area m1. As a result, the display of the one display device is controlled by both the program stored in the used area m1 and the program stored in the unused area m2.
Further, even in the case of such a configuration, the data signal for controlling the display of the one display device (data signal for controlling the display of the base ratio, and the set value) are the same as in the above embodiment. By applying a configuration in which the data signal (data signal for displaying) is initialized (cleared) by the program stored in the used area m1, the increase in the capacity of the program is suppressed, and the base ratio and the set value are set. It is possible to execute each display as appropriate.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above embodiment, the work area and the stack area temporarily used when the process related to the test specified in the game machine rules is executed are provided in the unused area M2 of the RAM 230.
However, the work area and the stack area temporarily used when the process related to the test specified in the game machine rules is executed may be provided in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

Further, in the above embodiment, the base ratio of the section is calculated for each predetermined section (period), and among the calculated base ratios, the base ratio corresponding to the current section and the base ratio corresponding to the previous section are used. , Is stored (stored). That is, the memory of the base ratio corresponding to the section before the previous two times is erased.
However, it is also possible to calculate the base ratio in the predetermined section (period) and store (store) all the calculated base ratios. That is, for all the sections for which the base ratio has been calculated, the base ratio corresponding to each section may be stored.

(Modification 5)
Further, in the above embodiment, the operation check (initial operation) may be executed for all the display units included in the performance display device 61 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, all the lighting elements (segments) included in the performance display device 61 may be configured to be lit in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking is continued for a predetermined time (5.0 [s])). Absent.

(Modification 6)
Further, in the above embodiment, the first base ratio (base ratio of the current section) and the second base ratio (base ratio of the previous section) are stored, and the performance display device 61 stores the first base ratio. The base ratio and the second base ratio are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals.
However, the base ratios related to three or more sections (three sections, four sections, etc.) that are different from each other are stored, and the base ratios corresponding to each section are sequentially displayed in a predetermined order on the performance display device 61. It may be configured as such. At this time, the display of the base ratio on the performance display device 61 is switched from the base ratio corresponding to one section to the base ratio corresponding to the other section every predetermined time (for example, 5.0 [s]). It may be configured.

1 Pachinko machine 60 Main display 61 Performance display device 200 Main control circuit 210 CPU
220 ROM
230 RAM
300 Production control circuit 400 Payout control circuit m1 Used area m2 Non-used area

Claims (3)

The number of game balls that are fired in the game region, and the winning balls number to be paid out according to the game ball entering the sphere to a predetermined input ball port, and a display unit capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on,
And settable control means control information for controlling the display of said display means,
The first area, the second area, the third area used when executing the program stored in the first area, and the third area used when executing the program stored in the second area. A fourth region and a storage unit including the fourth region are provided.
The information stored in the third area can be referred to by the program stored in the second area.
The information stored in the third area cannot be rewritten by the program stored in the second area.
Game in which blocking of power is when it is detected, said control information set by the second region stored program, characterized in that it is cleared by the program stored in the first region Machine. The program stored in the second area is executed based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity, and the program is executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein when a power cutoff is detected, the occurrence of the predetermined trigger is limited . Equipped with a lottery means to execute a winning lottery according to the set value,
The set value can be displayed by the display means.
The control information used for displaying the set value is set by the program stored in the first area.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the control information used for displaying the predetermined information is set by a program stored in the second area .

Images